JP6892619B2 - Pachinko game machine - Google Patents

Description

Regarding pachinko gaming machines.

In recent pachinko gaming machines, a jackpot lottery with a predetermined probability is performed when a game ball enters the starting port on the game board surface (game area), and if the jackpot lottery is won, a jackpot (special game) ) The mainstream is a pachinko machine that shifts to the state and can win a large number of prize balls by opening the large winning opening provided on the game board surface. In addition, pachinko gaming machines that can win prize balls when a game ball enters a winning opening such as a starting port on the game board surface (game area) are the mainstream.

Actual climb 3022063 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-165859

However, because the angle of the game nail changes due to the collision of the game balls flowing down the game board surface (game area), the efficiency of the game balls entering a certain winning opening is assumed at the time of shipment of the game machine. It may be different from the ball entry efficiency that was used, and even in such a case, there is a problem that it is not possible to determine how much the ball entry efficiency is for each winning opening.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect includes a game board, a game area provided in the game board, and a plurality of winning openings in which a game ball can be entered and a prize ball is given when the game ball is inserted. , An information display unit capable of displaying information, a discharge detection unit for detecting game balls discharged from the game area, a storage means capable of storing data, and a game ball entering the plurality of winning openings. It is provided with a ball entry determination means capable of detecting a ball, and an emission counting means for counting the number of detections in the emission detection unit, and is based on the entry of a game ball into the plurality of winning openings based on the detection result by the ball entry determination means. It is configured to generate information on the ball entry status and display the generated ball entry status information on the information display unit, and the ball entry status information is divided into a plurality of items having different display contents. It is possible to display, and when displaying the ball entry status information on the information display unit, the ball entry status information corresponding to the plurality of items is switched and displayed at predetermined periods, and information suggesting each item is entered. It is configured to be displayed at the same time as the state information, has a ROM and a RAM as the storage means, and has a first ROM area related to the progress of the game and a second ROM area not related to the progress of the game as the area in the ROM. A predetermined unused area is provided between the first ROM area and the second ROM area, and as an area in the RAM, a first RAM area for storing information related to processing in the first ROM area and the first RAM area. There is a second RAM area for storing information related to processing in the 2 ROM area, and a predetermined unused area is provided between the first RAM area and the second RAM area. As the first RAM area, the first operation There is an area and a first stack area, and a predetermined unused area is provided between the first work area and the first stack area. As the second RAM area, a second work area and a second work area are provided. There is a stack area, a predetermined unused area is provided between the second work area and the second stack area, and the ball entry state information is obtained by processing in the second ROM area to the second RAM. When the ball entry status information exceeds a predetermined value calculated using the area, the display mode of the ball entry status information is displayed on the information display unit in a display mode different from the usual one, and the emission counting means is used. If the detected number is less than the particular number, you and displaying the information display unit in a display mode different from the usual information suggesting each item.

According to the pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect, it is possible to determine how much the ball entry efficiency is for each winning opening.

FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a unit configuration diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the prize ball payout unit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is an operation diagram of the prize ball payout unit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a functional block diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a main flowchart on the main control board side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of a ball entry detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart of an auxiliary game start port entry ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flowchart of a main game start port entry ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of the first (second) winning opening ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flowchart of a general winning opening ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the discharge ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of an out-port / in-ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of a prize ball number determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of an auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of an electric accessory drive determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of a random number acquisition process for determining the main game content on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of a main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of a special game operating condition determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of a special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the number of balls entered on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is a flowchart of fraud detection information management processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart of error management processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 30 is a flowchart of a prize ball payout command transmission control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 31 is a flowchart of a payout control board transmission control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 32 is an image diagram relating to the prize ball payout command and the payout-related information on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the payout control board reception control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the external signal output processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 35 is a flowchart of the payout control board side main process on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of an error control process at the time of abnormality detection on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 37 is a flowchart of an error control process when a payout motor operation abnormality is detected on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of an error control process when a payout abnormality is detected on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 39 is a flowchart of an error control process when a ball path abnormality is detected on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of an error control process when a payout motor abnormality is detected on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 41 is a flowchart of an error control process when a payout stop abnormality is detected on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 42 is a flowchart of prize ball payout-related information transmission / reception processing (to the main control board) on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 43 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout control process (at the time of starting the prize ball payout / starting the motor drive) on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout control process (at the end of motor drive / at the end of prize ball payout) on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout control process (when the motor is driven) on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of a motor error processing on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 47 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the hold information management process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of a special game-related display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of an error notification execution process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 53 is a main flowchart on the main control board side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the discharge ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of a prize ball number determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the base determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart of the maintenance mode execution process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the maintenance mode execution process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 59 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 60 is a flowchart of maintenance mode display processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 61 is a flowchart of a main game start port entry ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 62 is a flowchart of a general winning opening ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 63 is a flowchart of the discharge ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 64 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 65 is a flowchart of the base determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 66 is a flowchart of the maintenance mode display process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 67 is a memory map configuration diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 68 is a main flowchart on the main control board side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 69 is a main flowchart on the main control board side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the maintenance mode execution process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 71 is a main flowchart on the main control board side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 72 is a flowchart of the discharge ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the prize ball number determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 74 is a flowchart of the maintenance mode execution process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 75 is a flowchart of the maintenance mode execution process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 76 is a main flowchart on the main control board side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 77 is a flowchart of a main game start port entry ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 78 is a flowchart of a general winning opening ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 79 is a flowchart of the maintenance mode execution process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 80 is a flowchart of the number of balls entered on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 81 is a flowchart of a main game start port entry ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 82 is a flowchart of a general winning opening ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 83 is a flowchart of the discharge ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 84 is a flowchart of the maintenance mode execution process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 85 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 86 is a flowchart of maintenance mode display processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 87 is a flowchart of the base determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 88 is a flowchart of external signal output processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 89 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 90 is a main flowchart on the main control board side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 91 is a flowchart of backup execution control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 92 is a main flowchart on the main control board side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 93 is a flowchart of the main game start port entry ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 94 is a flowchart of a general winning opening ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 95 is a flowchart of the discharge ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 96 is a flowchart of the number of balls entered on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 97 is a flowchart of the main game discharge number confirmation process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 98 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 99 is a flowchart of the sub-game entry confirmation process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 100 is a flowchart of a sub-game entry determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 101 is a flowchart of the sub-game side emission number confirmation process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 102 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 103 is a flowchart of a RAM clear backup process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 104 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 105 is a main flowchart on the main control board side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 106 is a flowchart of a prize ball number determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 107 is a flowchart of a discharge ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 108 is a flowchart of a ball entry state calculation process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 109 is an image diagram of a ball entry information backup in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 110 is a display example of the ball entry state display device in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 111 is an example of arrangement of the main game start opening and the general winning opening in the pachinko gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 112 is a list 1 of configurations relating to information relating to ball entry, which can be applied to the pachinko gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 113 is a list 2 of configurations relating to information relating to ball entry, which can be applied to the pachinko gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 114 is a list 3 of configurations relating to information relating to ball entry, which can be applied to the pachinko gaming machine according to this example.

Form to carry out

First, the meaning of each term in the present specification will be described. "Prize ball" includes not only a prize in which a prize ball is paid out, but also a passage to a "through chucker" in which no prize ball is paid out. The "identification information" may be in any form as long as the type of information can be identified through the five senses (visual, auditory, tactile, etc.), but preferably visual information such as numbers, letters, and patterns. Some of them have a shape such as. Further, in the present specification, the "identification information" may be referred to as a main game symbol / special symbol (special symbol) or a decorative symbol (designation), but the "special symbol (special symbol)" is a main control board. The identification information is displayed and controlled on the side, and the "decorative pattern (design)" is the identification information as an effect displayed on the sub-control board S side. "Displayable identification information" is not limited to the display method, and includes, for example, light emission of light emitting means (for example, liquid crystal, LED, 7-segment display) (including not only the presence or absence of light emission but also the difference in color) and physics. Display (for example, the symbol drawn on the reel band is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position) and the like. "Direction" refers to the display content that enhances the enjoyment of the game, for example, moving images such as animations and live-action photographs, still images such as pictures, photographs, characters, etc., including identification information fluctuation / stop, notice, etc. Combinations can be mentioned. The "open state, open state" and "closed state, closed state" are, for example, in the configuration of a general large winning opening (so-called attacker), the open state = easy winning state, and the closed state = non-winning state. It will be in an easy state. Further, for example, a state of protruding from the game board (player side) (hereinafter, may be referred to as an advanced state) and a state of being retracted into the game board (the side opposite to the player side) (hereinafter, referred to as an evacuation state). In a configuration that can take (there is) (so-called tongue-type attacker), the advance state = the winning state is easy, and the evacuation state = the winning non-easy state. A "random number" is a random number used in a lottery (a lottery by a computer) for determining some game content in a pachinko game machine, and includes a pseudo-random number in addition to a random number in a narrow sense (for example, a hard random number). Random numbers, soft random numbers as pseudo-random numbers). For example, the so-called "basic random number" that affects the result of the game, specifically, the "winning random number (random number for winning / failing lottery)" related to the transition of the special game, and the variation mode (or variation time) of the identification symbol are determined. "Random number for determining variable mode", "Random number for determining stop symbol", "Random number for determining winning symbol" for determining whether to shift to a specific game (for example, probability variable game) after a special game, etc. be able to. It is not necessary to use all of these random numbers when determining the content of the variation mode, the content of the definite identification information, and the like, and at least one random number that is the same as or different from each other may be used. Further, in the present specification, the number of random numbers may be displayed in the form of the number of random numbers or a plurality of random numbers, but once the entry port (for example, the start entry port) that triggers the acquisition of random numbers. The random number obtained by entering the ball is called one (that is, in the above example, a bundle of random numbers such as winning random number + fluctuation mode determination random number + symbol determination random number ... is called one random number). .. Further, for example, a kind of random number (for example, a winning random number) may also serve as another kind of random number (for example, a symbol determination random number). The "gaming state" is, for example, a transition to a special gaming state in which the large winning opening can be opened, a transition to a special gaming state rather than a non-probability variable gaming state in which the lottery probability is a predetermined value. Probability fluctuation game state with high probability of lottery, transition to special game Auxiliary game state with assistance for winning a prize at the start port that triggers the lottery (so-called normal symbol time saving state, for example, a variable member is attached to the start port In some cases, it is any one or a plurality of combinations such as a long opening period of the variable member, a high probability of winning the opening of the variable member, and a short time of notifying the result of the opening lottery of the variable member). The "ball entry status display" is a display of information related to the ball entry, and is a display of the number of balls entered into a predetermined entry port, a display of the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a ball into a predetermined entry port, and a plurality of. Display of the cumulative number of balls entered into the ball entrances, display of the number of prize balls paid out based on the number of balls entered into multiple entrances, display of the base value, display of the base value in a predetermined gaming state, and the ball entry ratio. , Display of the ball entry ratio in a predetermined game state, display of the bonus ratio, display of the continuous bonus ratio, display of the cumulative number of ejected balls, and the like. "Predetermined operation on the operating member" means pressing the sub input button (in this example, it is determined that the sub input button is pressed once when it is turned off → on → off for 0.5 seconds or less), sub input. Press and hold the button (in this example, it is judged to have been pressed for a long time when it is off → on for 10 seconds or more), press the RAM clear button (in this example, off → on for 0.5 seconds or less) → It is judged that it was pressed once when it was turned off), and the RAM clear button was pressed and held (in this example, it is judged that it was pressed and held when it was turned off for 10 seconds or more). , Operation of the launch handle, etc. The "operable operating member provided on the back side of the gaming machine" is a member provided on the back side that is invisible when the player is playing, and is, for example, a RAM clear button. .. The "operable operating member provided on the front side of the gaming machine" is a member provided on the front side that is visible when the player is playing, for example, a sub input button and a firing handle. ,.

The following embodiment is a model (type 1 type 1 multifunction device) in which two conventional type 1 pachinko gaming machines are mixed. However, this is not limited to this, and it is also within the range when applied to other gaming machines (for example, conventional pachinko gaming machines of type 1, type 2, type 3, general electric service, etc.). .. It should be noted that this embodiment is merely an example, and relates to the order of each step regarding various processes such as the location and function where each means exists, the timing of flag on / off, the name of the means responsible for the process of each step, and the like. It is not limited to the following aspects. Further, the above-described embodiments and modifications should not be limitedly understood to be applied to specific ones, and may be any combination. For example, it should be understood that a modification for one embodiment is a modification from another embodiment, and even if one modification and another modification are described independently. It should be understood that a combination of one modification and the other modification is also described. Further, in the present embodiment, there are a lottery table and a reference table for various tables, but these are also not limited, and the lottery table may be used as a reference table or vice versa. Further, the numerical values as specific examples shown in the following embodiments and modification {for example, winning probability at the time of lottery execution, maximum number of rounds at the time of special game, symbol fluctuation time, number of continuations in each game state, etc.} are This is just an example, and in particular, different conditions (for example, by the conditions of the first main game side and the second main game side, by the conditions of the probability fluctuation game and the non-probability fluctuation game, and the time reduction game and the non-time reduction game). It is understood that the magnitude relations and combinations of the numerical values shown in (conditions with the time reduction game, etc.) may be changed as appropriate as long as they do not deviate significantly from the purpose of the following embodiments and modification examples. Should. For example, the magnitude relationship between the first main game side and the second main game side in terms of the winning probability at the time of lottery execution and the expected value of the maximum number of rounds at the time of special game is that the first main game side = the second main game side. Even if it is illustrated as such, even if the magnitude relationship is appropriately changed such that the first main game side <second main game side, or the first main game side> second main game side. Good (same for other numbers and conditions). Further, for example, when the number of continuations of the probability fluctuation game state is configured based on the purpose of continuing until the next big hit occurs, whether to set "65535" as the number of continuations (configured to substantially continue). Alternatively, even in the option of the realization method based on the same purpose, such as maintaining the probability fluctuation game state until the next big hit occurs without setting the number of continuations, as long as the purpose of the following embodiments and modification examples is not significantly deviated. Should be understood that may be changed as appropriate.

Here, before explaining each component, the features (outline) of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

First, the basic structure on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. The pachinko gaming machine is roughly divided into a gaming machine frame D and a gaming board Da, and the gaming machine frame D and the gaming board Da are each formed by assembling a plurality of units. Hereinafter, each unit constituting the game machine frame D and the game board Da will be described in order.

First, the gaming machine frame D of the pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame unit D12, a front frame unit D14, a transparent plate unit (also called a glass unit) D16, a door unit (or a glass door) D18, and a ball plate unit D17. (The upper ball plate D20, the lower ball plate D22, and the launch handle D44 are collectively referred to as D17).

The outer frame unit D12 is a frame body for fixing the pachinko gaming machine at a position where it should be installed, and is a frame body for up, down, left and right (upper frame rod D12d, lower frame rod D12e, left frame rod D12a, right frame rod D12b). And the curtain plate D12c are appropriately assembled in a frame shape to form a unit. Here, one set of upper and lower front frame hinges D12a-1 for assembling the front frame unit D14 is fixed to the left frame rod D12a, and the outer side for locking the front frame unit D14 is fixed to the right frame rod D12b. The locking bracket (not shown) on the frame side is fixed. Further, in the present embodiment, the curtain plate D12c is provided with a speaker D24 capable of outputting sound according to the game state, and the left and right frame rods (left frame rod D12a, right frame rod D12b) are vertically and vertically made of metal. The frame rods (upper frame rod D12d, lower frame rod D12e) are made of wood, and the curtain plate D12c is made of resin.

The front frame unit D14 is a frame body whose outer size matches the opening portion of the outer frame unit D12, and includes a front frame hinge D12a-1 and a locking metal fitting (not shown) provided in the outer frame unit D12, and a front frame unit D14. A hinge mechanism D14a-1 (corresponding to these) and a locking device (not shown) provided at appropriate positions of the frame unit D14 allow the outer frame unit D12 to be laterally opened / closed and locked.

The front frame unit D14 has a launching mechanism for launching a game ball, a game board accommodating mechanism for detachably accommodating a game board Da, a prize ball payout mechanism for awarding a prize ball, and guiding or guiding a gamed ball. A gamed ball discharge mechanism or the like for collecting is provided. In the present embodiment, the game board accommodating mechanism is formed as a base, and the front frame main body D14a to which the launch mechanism is attached and the front frame main body D14a are detachably attached to the prize ball payout mechanism and the gamed ball discharge. The back mechanism unit D14b on which the mechanism is formed and the front frame unit D14 are formed from the back mechanism unit D14b. Further, on the left side portion of the front frame main body D14a, a pair of upper and lower glass frame hinges D14a-2 for assembling the door unit D18 described later are provided, and the door unit D18 is provided on the right side portion of the front frame main body D14a. A locking device for a glass frame (not shown) for locking is provided. Further, a ball plate unit support mechanism (including a ball plate hinge D14a-3) for assembling the ball plate unit D17, which will be described later, is provided below the front frame main body D14a.

The transparent plate unit D16 is for holding a plurality of (for example, two) transparent plates D16a such as glass or acrylic plates in parallel at a predetermined interval (about 20 mm), and has a U-shape. After the glass is inserted into the glass holding portion (not shown) formed on the one member D16b, the second member D16c that shields the inserted portion is fitted and adhered to be integrally formed. The transparent plate unit D16 (particularly, the transparent plate D16a) can see through the game area D30 of the game board Da through the opening surface of the door unit D18 described later, and foreign matter does not enter through the opening surface (the said). It is attached so as to make it difficult to access the game board Da and the game area D30 from the opening surface).

The door unit (glass door) D18 is provided at appropriate positions of the glass frame hinge D14a-2 and the glass frame locking device (not shown) provided on the front frame unit D14, and the door unit D18 (corresponding to these). By the hinge mechanism and the locking bracket (not shown), the front frame unit D14 can be opened and closed sideways and locked. The door unit D18 has an outer size that substantially matches the outer shape of the game board Da, and an opening D18a is provided in the center in an area smaller than that of the transparent plate unit D16. The game board Da and the game area D30, which will be described later, are visible via the D16.

The door unit D18 has a transparent plate unit holding portion D18b for holding the transparent plate unit D16 on the back side thereof, and a decorative portion decorated around the opening D18a so as to obtain an illumination effect or a visual effect. D18c and the like are also formed. In the present embodiment, the frame decoration lamp D18-L is arranged at the upper right portion of the door unit D18. It should be noted that the frame decoration lamp D18-L may be turned on to display information related to the entry of a ball, which will be described later.
Details of the component configuration and the like of the door unit D18 will be described later.

The ball dish unit D17 includes a ball dish unit support mechanism (including a ball dish hinge D14a-3) provided on the front frame unit D14 and an engaging member (for example, an engagement member) provided at an appropriate position on the ball dish unit D17. It is detachably attached to the front frame unit D14 by the joint member D17a-1). The ball plate unit D17 can be attached to and detached from the front frame unit D14 only when the door unit D18 is opened and closed, so that the ball plate unit D17 can be removed while being used for the game without providing a key dedicated to the gaming machine. A difficult structure (for example, a structure in which a part of the door unit D18 and a part of the ball plate unit D17 wrap) is adopted.

The ball plate unit D17 has an outer size formed in a square shape, and the upper ball plate D20 that supplies game balls to the launching device at the upper part and a large number of prize balls at the lower part pay out the upper ball plate. When an excess of game balls is supplied to D20, a lower ball plate D22 capable of storing the excess game balls is formed, and on the right side of the lower ball plate D22, the firing intensity of the launching device (game) is operated by the player. A firing handle D44 for adjusting the hitting position of the ball) is provided. Further, on a part of the surface of the ball plate unit D17 (in this example, the upper surface of the upper ball plate D20), a sub-input button SB operated by the player at the time of production, and a rental operation unit for requesting the rental of the game ball ( (Not shown) is arranged. Further, a speaker D24 is provided between the upper ball plate D20 and the lower ball plate D22. The details of the component configuration and the like of the ball plate unit D17 will be described later.

The schematic configuration of the gaming machine frame D in the present embodiment is as described above. As described above, the gaming machine frame D is composed of a plurality of units, and more specifically, the front of the outer frame unit D12. The front frame unit D14 (including the game board Da), the transparent plate unit D16, the door unit D18, and the ball plate unit D17 are detachably (or openable and closable) in front of the front frame unit D14. Therefore, the matching portion of each unit has a minute gap for facilitating the opening / closing operation and the attaching / detaching operation. Therefore, in the present embodiment, although not shown, the matching portion of each unit has a labyrinth structure (concave and convex shape in cross-sectional view) so that the gap is not linear in order to prevent foreign matter from entering the matching portion. It is desirable (but not limited to) to adopt a structure that results in

In the present embodiment, the door unit D18 and the ball plate unit D17 adopt a separate structure, but both may adopt an integrated structure. Further, in the present embodiment, a structure is adopted in which a physical game medium is paid out according to a game result, but an electronic medium management may be performed. In that case, the lower ball plate D22, the prize ball payout mechanism, etc. are not required, and a gaming machine form (so-called enclosed circulation form) in which the gamed ball is returned to the upper ball plate D20 and electronically managed is adopted. It should be added that the dish unit D17, the door unit D18, and the like will be provided with an operation unit for settlement / rental by an electronic medium.

Next, the game board Da is formed with a game area D30 partitioned by an outer rail D32 and an inner rail D34. Then, in the game area D30, in addition to the mechanisms such as a plurality of game nails and windmills, the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10, the auxiliary game start port H10, the general winning opening P10, and the first The large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, the effect display device SG, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20, the center decoration D38, and the out opening C80 is set up. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail in order.

First, the first main game start opening A10 is installed as a start winning opening corresponding to the first main game. As a specific configuration, the first main game start port A10 includes a first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s. Here, the first main game start port entry detection device A11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first main game start opening A10, and the first main game start indicating the entry at the time of entry. Generates mouth ball information.

Next, the second main game start opening B10 is installed as a start winning opening corresponding to the second main game. As a specific configuration, the second main game start port B10 includes a second main game start port entry ball detection device B11s and a second main game start port electric accessory B11d. Here, the second main game start port entry detection device B11s is a sensor that detects the entry of the game ball into the second main game start port B10, and the second main game start indicating the entry at the time of entry. Generates mouth ball information. Next, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter the second main game start port B10 {a ball receiving member formed in a flat plate shape (hereinafter, referred to as a ball receiving member). ) Is retracted from the game area D30} and is variable to an open state in which the game ball can enter (a state in which the ball receiving member protrudes into the game area D30). Here, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d in the present embodiment employs an electric accessory (so-called tongue electric) in which the ball receiving portion slides back and forth, and when the game is in the open state, the game is played. The ball receiving member protruding into the area D30 receives the game ball and guides the game ball to the second ball entry detection device B11s (arranged inside the game board). Further, in the present embodiment, as the electric accessory, an electric accessory in which the ball receiving member slides back and forth so that it is difficult to accept the game ball in the opening operation in a short time is adopted. The so-called tulip-type electric accessory may be adopted, which is not limited to the closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter, and the open state in which the game ball is easier to enter than the closed state. ..

Here, in the present embodiment, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are provided apart from each other, and the game flows down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area). The ball is configured so that it is easy to be guided to the first main game start port A10, while it is difficult to be guided to the second main game start port B10. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is difficult to be guided to the first main game start port A10, while is easily guided to the second main game start port B10. .. It should be noted that "easy to be guided" and "difficult to be guided" are determined by, for example, the size of the number of balls entered when 10,000 balls are launched to the right and left sides, respectively.

In the present embodiment, the electric accessory is provided on the second main game start port B10 side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the electric accessory is provided on the first main game start port A10 side. You may. Further, in the present embodiment, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are arranged apart from each other, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first main game start port A10 and the first main game start port A10 are arranged. The two main game start ports B10 may be arranged so as to overlap each other. In that case, the upper part of the second main game start port B10 is blocked by the presence of the first main game start port A10. You may.

Next, the auxiliary game start port H10 includes an auxiliary game start port entry ball detection device H11s. Here, the auxiliary game start opening ball entry detection device H11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the auxiliary game start opening H10, and generates auxiliary game start opening entry information indicating the entry at the time of entry. To do. The entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game start port H10 triggers a lottery for expanding the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10.

Next, the general winning opening P10 includes a general winning opening entry ball detection device P11s. The general winning opening ball detection device P11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the general winning opening P10, and generates general winning opening entry information indicating the entry at the time of entry. By entering the game balls into the general winning opening P10, a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of the game balls will be paid out as prize balls. A plurality of general winning openings P10 are provided, and a game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) and a game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area). , All of them are easy to enter the general winning opening P10. There is no problem even if the number of general winning openings P10 is changed, and even if only the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easy to enter, the left side of the game area D30 (center of the game area). It may be easy to enter only the game ball that flows down (based on).

Here, in the present embodiment, the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is difficult to be guided to the auxiliary game start port H10, while the right side of the game area D30 (referenced to the center of the game area). ) Is configured to be easily guided to the auxiliary game start port H10 {However, the game ball is not limited to this, and the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) Also, it may be configured so that it can be easily guided to the auxiliary game start port H10}.

Next, above the out opening C80 (particularly, on the right side of the game area D30), a first large winning opening C10 and a second large winning opening C20 are provided, and the right side of the game area D30 (center of the game area) The game ball flowing down the reference) is configured to easily pass through the area where the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20 are arranged before reaching the out opening C80.

Next, the first big winning opening C10 has a horizontal rectangular shape and is an out opening that opens when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) stops the big hit symbol. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is located above C80 (particularly, on the right side of the game area D30). As a specific configuration, the first large winning opening C10 includes a first large winning opening winning detection device C11s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a first large winning opening electric accessory C11d (and a first large winning opening). The mouth solenoid C13) is provided. Here, the first large winning opening winning detection device C11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first large winning opening C10, and the first large winning opening entry information indicating the entry at the time of entry. To generate. The first large winning opening electric accessory C11d changes the first large winning opening C10 into a normal state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to win in the first large winning opening C10 and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win (the first). 1 The big winning opening solenoid C13 is excited and changed). In the present embodiment, the mode of the large winning opening is changed to a normal state in which the game ball has a horizontal rectangular shape and the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win, and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win. Not limited to. In that case, for example, an advance state in which the rod-shaped member provided in the large winning opening is projected toward the player side and an evacuation state in which the rod-shaped member is retracted toward the player side can be adopted (so-called so-called). The large winning opening itself has a box-shaped member that is a sliding attacker and can accept a game ball that protrudes from the game area D30 and flows down the game area D30. The large winning opening is closed due to the obstruction of acceptance of the game ball to the box, and when the box-shaped member is in the retracted state, the large winning opening is open due to the acceptance of the game ball into the box-shaped member. It is also preferable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entered into the large winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

Next, the second big winning opening C20 forms a horizontal rectangular shape and is out, which is opened when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) stops at the jackpot symbol. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is located above the opening C80 (particularly, on the right side of the game area D30). Specifically, the second major winning opening C20 includes a second major winning opening winning detection device C21s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a second major winning opening electric accessory C21d (and a second major winning opening). The mouth solenoid C23) is provided. Here, the second large winning opening winning detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second large winning opening C20, and the second large winning opening entry information indicating the entry at the time of entry. To generate. Then, the game ball that has entered the second special winning opening C20 is configured to be detected by the second large winning opening winning detection device C21s. Next, the second large winning opening electric accessory C21d has the second large winning opening C20 in a normal state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to win in the second large winning opening C20 and in an open state in which the game ball is easy to win. It is made variable (the second prize opening solenoid C23 is excited to make it variable). In the present embodiment, the mode of the large winning opening is changed to a normal state in which the game ball has a horizontal rectangular shape and the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win, and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win. Not limited to. In that case, for example, an advance state in which the rod-shaped member provided in the large winning opening is projected toward the player side and an evacuation state in which the rod-shaped member is retracted toward the player side can be adopted (so-called so-called). The large winning opening itself has a box-shaped member that is a sliding attacker and can accept a game ball that protrudes from the game area D30 and flows down the game area D30. The large winning opening is closed due to the obstruction of acceptance of the game ball to the box, and when the box-shaped member is in the retracted state, the large winning opening is open due to the acceptance of the game ball into the box-shaped member. It is also preferable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entered into the large winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

Next, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) is related to the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) corresponding to the first main game (second main game). It is a device that executes the displayed display. As a specific configuration, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) includes a first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit B21g) and a first main game symbol display unit B21g. It is provided with a symbol holding display unit A21h (second main game symbol holding display unit B21h). Here, the first main game symbol hold display unit A21h (second main game symbol hold display unit B21h) is composed of four lamps, and the number of lamps lit is the first main game (second main game). Corresponds to the number of pending random numbers related to (the number of fluctuations in the main game symbol that has not been executed). The first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit B21g) is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) is "0" to "9". It is displayed with 10 kinds of numbers of "" and "-" of the loss {However, it is not limited to this, and the 7-segment LED is displayed so that it becomes difficult for the player to recognize which main game symbol is displayed. It is preferable to use and display by a symbol or the like. Further, the holding number display is not limited to being composed of four lamps, and a maximum of four holding numbers can be displayed (for example, it is composed of one lamp and is held. Number 1: Lighting, Number of Holds 2: Blinking at low speed, Number of Holds 3: Blinking at medium speed, Number of Holds 4: Blinking at high speed).

Since the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) does not necessarily have to have a directing role, in the present embodiment, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) The size of is set to be inconspicuous. However, when a method is adopted in which the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) itself has a directing role and the first decorative symbol (second decorative symbol) is not displayed, the effect described later is used. A liquid crystal display such as the display device SG may be configured to display the first main game symbol (second main game symbol).

Next, the effect display device SG is a device that displays an effect image including a decorative symbol that fluctuates / stops in conjunction with the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. Here, as a specific configuration, the effect display device SG includes a display area SG10 in which the effect is executed including the variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the display area SG10 includes a first hold display unit SG12 (and a second hold display unit SG13) that displays main game hold information, and, for example, a moving image of a plurality of rows of decorative symbol fluctuations that imitate a game of a slot machine. It has a decorative symbol display area SG11 and a display area SG11 for displaying. Although the effect display device SG is configured by a liquid crystal display in the present embodiment, it may be configured by other display means such as a mechanical drum or an LED. Next, the first hold display unit SG12 (and the second hold display unit SG13) is composed of four lamps, and the lamps are interlocked with the hold lamps of the main game symbol.

Next, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 is a device that executes display and the like related to the auxiliary game symbol. As a specific configuration, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 includes an auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g and an auxiliary game symbol hold display unit H21h. Here, the auxiliary game symbol hold display unit H21h is composed of four lamps, and the number of lamps lit corresponds to the number of reserved auxiliary game symbol changes (the number of auxiliary game symbol changes that have not been executed).

Next, the center decoration D38 is installed around the effect display device SG, and has functions such as a flow path of a game ball, protection of the effect display device SG, and decoration. Further, the game effect lamp D26 is provided in an area other than the game area D30 or the game area D30, and plays a role of directing by blinking or the like. It should be noted that the game effect lamp D26 may be turned on to display information related to ball entry, which will be described later.

Next, the ball entry status display device J10 determines the entry status of the game ball into the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10, and the general winning opening P10 {non-probability variable game state and non-time reduction game. It is a display device that displays information on whether the ball entry status in the state (main game probability change flag off and main game time reduction flag off) is normal or abnormal}. In addition, when the ball entry status is abnormal, the game nail that guides the game ball to flow down toward the general winning opening P10 is bent in a direction different from that at the time of shipment of the gaming machine, and the general winning opening P10 is reached. It is abnormal that it is difficult to enter even if the game ball is continuously fired at the target. In the present embodiment, the ratio of the game ball that has entered the first main game start port A10 or the second main game start port B10 to the game ball that has entered the general winning opening P10 is out of the assumed range. It is configured to determine that it is abnormal if it is. Further, although the details will be described later, the elements that can be displayed by the ball entry status display device J10 are not limited to those described above, and the base value (the number of prize balls paid out by the predetermined winning opening) is the game ball. It is a value obtained by multiplying the value divided by the total number of launched balls by 100, and details will be described later), and various other elements can be displayed.

Next, the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko gaming machine controls the overall operation of the pachinko gaming machine, and controls the overall game operation (that is, the game, such as a lottery when the ball enters the first main game starting port A10 (second main game starting port B10). The main control board M that performs control that is directly related to the interests of the pachinko machine, and the effect control means (sub-main control unit) that performs display control related to various effects on the effect display device SG that gives interest to the game content. The SM, the sub-sub control unit SS that mainly executes the effect display, the error lamp SS3 that lights up when a predetermined error occurs and notifies the occurrence of the error, the prize ball tank KT, the prize ball rail KR, and the prizes in each winning opening. Controls the payout operation of the prize ball payout device (set base) KE equipped with the prize ball payout unit KE10, etc., which pays out the game balls supplied from the prize ball tank KT to the upper ball plate D20, and the prize ball payout unit KE10. The prize ball payout control board KH, the error display KH3 that displays the occurrence status of the error related to the payout (for example, 7-segment display), the error release switch KH3a for canceling a predetermined error, and the upper ball plate D20. A launching device D42 that launches one game ball (reservoir ball) into the gaming area D30, a launch control board D40 that controls the launching operation of the launching device D42, and a power supply unit that supplies power to each part of the pachinko gaming machine. E and a power switch Ea, which is a switch for turning on / off the power of the pachinko gaming machine, are provided on the back surface of the front frame unit D14 (opposite to the gaming side).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5, the structure of the prize ball payout unit KE10 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment and the operating principle for paying out the game balls will be described. First, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 4, the prize ball payout unit KE10 has a payout motor (stepping motor) KE10m that is driven at the time of payout. Then, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 4, the prize ball payout unit KE10 has a sprocket KE10p connected to the stepping motor KE10m. The prize ball payout unit KE10 having such a structure operates according to the following principle. First, when a game ball enters the winning opening in the game area, a winning signal is sent to the main control board M, the main control board M determines the number of payouts, and the prize ball signal is transmitted to the prize ball payout control board KH. To do. Alternatively, a game ball lending device such as a card unit R requests ball lending to the prize ball payout control board KH. In response to this, the prize ball payout control board KH operates the prize ball payout unit KE10, and the stepping motor KE10m in the prize ball payout unit KE10 executes the payout of the game ball. As shown in FIG. 5, the rotation of the stepping motor KE10m causes the sprocket KE10p (a member in which the first sprocket KE10p1, the second sprocket KE10p2, and the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 are integrated) to rotate, and the game ball is moved. One ball is paid out one by one. Further, the paid-out game balls are detected by the payout count sensor KE10s continuously provided downstream of the prize ball payout unit KE10. It should be added that the cross sections CC are shown along the flow path of the game ball (the flow path is easy to see) as shown in the figure.

Further, the lower part of FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing a rotor position confirmation sensor (payout motor position sensor) KE10ms and a rotating body (sprocket) KE10p (one example). The rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms is a photosensor that has a pair of measuring units and detects an object between the measuring units by transmitting and receiving light. Here, the pair of measurement units are a light projecting unit that projects light and a light receiving unit that receives light from the light projecting unit, and are arranged so as to sandwich the rotation confirmation member KE10p3. Here, the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 has six recesses formed along the circumference, and is turned off when the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 is interposed between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion. When the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 is not interposed between the light emitting part and the light receiving part, it is turned on (the state in the lower part of FIG. 4).

Next, the electrical schematic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment pays out the game balls based on the main control board M that controls the progress of the game and the information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M. Various effects on the display device SG, such as fluctuation / stop of decorative symbols based on the information (signals, commands, etc.) from the prize ball payout control board KH to be controlled and the main control board M, the sound from the speaker D24, The sub-control board S (in this example, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are arranged on one board) that controls the lighting of the game effect lamp D26 and the execution of error notification, etc., and these It is mainly composed of a power supply unit E that supplies power to the entire gaming machine including a control board. Here, the sub-control board S is a sub-main control unit SM that controls various effects on the effect display device SG such as fluctuation / stop of decorative symbols, sound from the speaker D24, lighting of the game effect lamp D26, and error notification. It is provided with two control units, a sub-sub control unit SS, which executes display processing such as variable display / stop display, hold display, and notice display of decorative symbols on the effect display device SG. The main control board M, the prize ball payout control board KH, the sub-main control unit SM, and the sub-sub control unit SS include CPUs that perform various arithmetic processes.
ROM that stores the program that defines the arithmetic processing of the CPU in advance, RAM that temporarily stores the data handled by the CPU (various data generated during the game, computer programs read from the ROM, etc.), information at the time of power failure A backup area (and a backup power supply) for holding is installed.

Hereinafter, the schematic configuration of each substrate and the electrical connection mode between each substrate / device will be outlined. First, the main control board M includes a winning opening sensor Ns {the first main game starting port entry ball detection device A11s described above, a second main game start opening entry ball detection device B11s, an auxiliary game start opening entry ball detection device H11s, and the first 1 big prize opening prize detection device C11s, 2nd big prize opening winning detection device C21s, general winning opening winning ball detection device P11s}, drive solenoid (described above, 1st big winning opening solenoid C13, 2nd big prize) Game peripheral devices (first main game peripheral device A, second main game peripheral device B in the figure) that are essential input / output devices for the progress of the game, such as mouth solenoid C23) and information display LED (not shown). , 1st and 2nd main game shared peripheral devices C, auxiliary game peripheral devices H), and control the progress of the game based on the input signals from each input device. Further, the main control board M is also electrically connected to the prize ball payout control board KH and the sub control board S (sub-main control unit SM / sub-sub control unit SS), and the prize ball is paid out based on the progress of the game. Information (commands) related to the above and the like can be transmitted to the prize ball payout control board KH, and information (commands) related to the progress state of the production / game can be transmitted to the sub-control board S.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 6, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are configured to enable bidirectional communication, while the main control board M and the sub-main are configured. The control unit SM is configured to enable one-way communication from the main control board M to the sub-main control unit SM (the communication method may be either serial communication or parallel communication). The communication between the control boards (between the control devices) may be one-way communication or two-way communication. Further, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH output game-related information and payout-related information to the hall computer HC as external output information (output to the hall computer HC side) via the external relay terminal board G. One-way communication) is possible.

Next, the prize ball payout control board KH is a prize ball payout device KE that executes the payout of game balls, and a device that can be operated by the player and receives a game ball lending request to the prize ball payout control board KH. It is connected to the game ball lending device R (card unit R) for transmission. Further, although not shown, in the present embodiment, the control circuit unit (launch control board D40) of the launching device is provided in the prize ball payout control board KH, and the prize ball payout control board KH and the launching device D42 ( It is also connected to the launch handle, launch motor, ball feeder, etc.). In the present embodiment, the game ball lending device R is separated from the game machine and adjacent to the game machine, but it may be integrated with the game machine. In that case, the game ball lending control board KH is used for lending. Control and management of recording media for lending electronic money and the like may be supervised.

Next, the sub-control board S includes an effect display device SG for displaying decorative symbols and the like, a speaker D24, a game effect lamp D26, and other drive devices for effect (not shown, but so-called effect). It is connected to the motor / solenoid of the movable body accessory. Further, by executing a predetermined operation (long press or press), the start or end of the measurement of the base value, the execution of the predetermined effect, the start of the display of the maintenance mode, etc. can be executed by the sub input button SB. Is also connected to the sub-control board S. Further, it can be determined that the sub-input button SB has been operated by the detection by the sub-input button detection device SBs. In the present embodiment, as described above, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are provided in the sub-control board S, and the sub-main control unit SM controls the sound output from the speaker D24 and the game effect ( Illuminations) Lighting control of the lamp D26 and determination control of the display contents to be displayed on the effect display device SG are performed, and the sub-sub control unit SS performs display control (substantial display control) on the effect display device SG. It is configured to be used. In the present embodiment, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are configured to be integrated by the sub-control board S, but the present invention is not limited to this (configured as a separate board). However, by configuring them to be integrated, there are merits such as space merit and reduction of the situation where noise is mixed in the wiring etc.). Further, the division of work between the two control units can be appropriately changed, for example, the voice control is executed by the sub-sub control unit SS (suitable when adopting a VDP integrated with a voice control circuit). Further, an electronic value may be given without giving a physical prize ball as a prize ball.

Next, the flow path of the game ball provided for the game will be described with reference to the flow path image diagram of the game ball in the lower part of the figure. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the gaming balls launched into the gaming area D30 are each entry port {1st main game start port A10, 2nd main game start port B10, 1st major winning opening C10, 1st Enter one of the two major winning openings C20, general winning opening P10, and out opening C80}, pass through the entry sensor corresponding to each entry opening, and be guided into the gaming machine (inside the gaming machine frame D). .. Here, the game ball that has entered the first main game start port A10 passes through the first main game start port confirmation sensor A11s2 provided for fraud detection. After that, all the gaming balls guided into the gaming machine pass through the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s and are discharged to the outside of the gaming machine. Although not particularly shown in this example, a switch for confirming ball entry {each entry port (for example, first main game start port A10, second main game start port B10, first major winning opening C10, first It is a switch through which a game ball that has entered the two major winning openings C20 (general winning opening) passes, and has one or more switches that are different from the switch for detecting the entry into each entry opening}. It is assumed that

Next, various functions of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 7. First, the main control board M is a game peripheral device (first main game peripheral device A, second main game peripheral device B, first and second main game shared peripheral device C, auxiliary game peripheral device H) related to the game. It is connected to the sub-main control unit SM (secondary game control means SM) related to the production and the prize ball payout control board KH that controls the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout instruction from the main control board M so that information can be transmitted. ing. Further, the sub-main control unit SM (secondary game control means SM) includes a sub-sub control unit SS (effect display means SS) that executes an image effect, various game effect lamps D26 (for example, side lamps), and a frame decoration lamp D18-L. It is also electrically connected to the speaker D24 and the like. Further, the prize ball payout control board KH is electrically connected to the prize ball payout device KE provided with a stepping motor, a sprocket, and the like. The main control board M, the sub-main control unit SM (secondary game control means SM), the sub-sub control unit SS (effect display means SS), the prize ball payout control board KH, etc. are hardware data and programs. It is composed of a ROM or RAM for storing a device, an element such as a CPU used for arithmetic processing, and the like. It should be noted that each means included in the main control board M below may be mounted on a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device). For example, each means included in the peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device) may be mounted on the main control board M. Hereinafter, details of each of the above means (devices) will be described.

First, the main control board M includes a game information control means MJ that controls acquisition of game information, a game content determination means MN for determining the content of the game, and a progress of a game such as a special game or a specific game. The game progress means MP that controls the game state, the game state temporary storage means MB for temporarily storing information related to the game state, etc., and the fraud detection information management means ME (and) that controls the processing related to the error or fraud detected by the game machine. Fraud-related information temporary storage means MEb) for temporarily storing information related to error detection and fraud detection, and measuring the ball entry status to various entrances, or related to the entry status to various entry ports. Various game information {for example, stop symbol information, stop symbol attribute information {for example, 16R jackpot, on the game peripheral device side (particularly, the sub-main control unit SM side) and the maintenance mode control means MO that controls the process of executing the display. 8R jackpot, 4R jackpot, loss}, information on fluctuation mode (for example, fluctuation time), start signal / state information / end signal of special game, hold information, etc.} Information transmission control means MT (and not transmitted) Command transmission buffer MT10) that stores commands, external signal output control means MG that outputs game-related information to the hall computer HC via the external relay terminal board G, and winning of game balls to various winning openings. Based on this, it has a prize ball payout determining means MH that controls the prize ball payout control board KH so as to pay out a predetermined prize ball.

Here, the game information control means MJ determines the entry determination means MJ10 for determining the inflow of the game ball into each entry port (starting port, etc.) and whether or not each random number can be acquired, and the determination result. Random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20 for acquiring each random number based on the above, and hold control means MJ30 for temporarily storing within the upper limit number of balls entering each start port during variable display as hold balls. doing. Hereinafter, each means will be described in detail.

First, the ball entry determination means MJ10 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the first main game start port A10 (and the first main game start port confirmation sensor A11s2). Judgment means MJ11-A, second main game start port entry determination means MJ11-B for determining whether or not a game ball has entered the second main game start port B10, and auxiliary game start port H10. Auxiliary game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-H for determining whether or not has flowed in, and the first large winning opening ball entry determination for determining whether or not a game ball has entered the first large winning opening C10. Means MJ11-C10 and the second major winning opening C20 for determining whether or not a game ball has entered the second major winning opening Judging means MJ11-C20 and the general winning opening P10 for a game ball The general winning opening ball entry determination means MJ11-P, which determines whether or not the game ball has entered the out opening C80, and the out opening opening ball entry determination means MJ11-C80, which determines whether or not a game ball has entered the out opening C80, and total discharge. With the total discharge confirmation means MJ11-C90 (and the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90 that counts the number of balls entered) that determines whether or not the game ball has entered (discarded) into the confirmation sensor C90s. , Ball entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b for temporarily storing information related to entry into the entrance, and a specific game such as a non-probability variable game state and a non-time reduction game state. A start port number counter MJ12c that measures the number of game balls that have entered the first main game start port A10 or the second main game start port B10 in a state, etc., and a non-probability variable game under specific circumstances (for example, a non-probability variable game). It has a general entry number counter MJ13c that measures the number of game balls that have entered the general winning opening P10 in a specific gaming state such as a state and a non-time shortening gaming state, etc.).

Next, the random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20 determines whether or not to acquire the first main game side random number based on the entry of the game ball into the first main game start port A10, and the random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20 determines whether or not to acquire the first main game side random number according to the determination result. To the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A for acquiring random numbers (for example, the first winning random number, the first variation mode determination random number, the first main game symbol determination random number, etc.) and the second main game start port B10. It is determined whether or not to acquire the second main game side random number based on the entry of the game ball, and the random number (for example, the second winning random number, the second variation mode determination random number, the second main) is determined according to the determination result. The second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B for acquiring the game symbol determination random number, etc.) and the auxiliary game random number for determining whether or not the auxiliary game side random number can be acquired and acquiring the random number based on the determination result. It has an acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H.

Here, the scope of claims including the above and the "random numbers" in the present specification are, for example, "0" to "65535" and "65535" assigned according to the type of random number (for example, a winning random number or a random number for determining a variation mode). It is a value randomly selected from a predetermined range such as "0" to "255". Further, the random number does not have to be a mathematically generated random number, and may be a pseudo-random number generated by a hardware random number, a software random number, or the like. For example, the expression method of each value in the random number is a method in which the values are expressed in sequence along the sequence of random numbers (plus one method), and the next value (initial value) when the final value of the sequence of random numbers is expressed. ) Is determined by a random value (initial value update method), a combination thereof, and the like.

Next, the hold control means MJ30 includes the hold digestion control means MJ31 that controls the process related to the hold digestion and the change start, and the first main game side random number acquired in a situation where the change permission of the first main game symbol is not given. The first for temporarily storing the random number in the first main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-A until the change permission of the first main game symbol is given based on the determination result. It is determined whether or not to temporarily store the main game symbol holding means MJ32-A and the second main game side random number acquired in a situation where the change permission of the second main game symbol has not been obtained, and based on the determination result, the above The second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B for holding the random number in the second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B until the change permission of the second main game symbol is given, and the auxiliary game symbol change permission It is determined whether or not to temporarily store the random number on the auxiliary game side acquired in a situation where the random number has not been downloaded, and based on the determination result, the random number is stored in the random number until the change permission of the auxiliary game symbol is given. It has an auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H for holding in.

Here, the reserved digestion control means MJ31 has a fluctuation start condition satisfaction determining means MJ31j for determining whether or not the condition for starting the fluctuation is satisfied.

Next, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B, and the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H can store up to four random numbers, which are combined with the holding order. The first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A, the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and the auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-H, respectively, for temporarily storing in the form of a random number. Have.

Next, the game content determination means MN determines whether or not the transition to the special game is possible and whether or not the second main game start port electric accessory B11d can be opened is selected by the winning / losing lottery means MN10, and the stop symbol of each symbol is determined based on each random number. It has a symbol content determining means MN40 for determining, and a variation mode determining means MN50 for determining a variation mode (variation time, etc.) of each symbol based on each random number. Here, the winning / failing lottery means MN10 includes a first main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-A for performing a winning / failing lottery for the first main game symbol and a second main game winning / failing lottery means for performing a winning / losing lottery for the second main game symbol. It has MN11-B and auxiliary game winning / failing lottery means MN11-H for performing a winning / failing lottery regarding the auxiliary game symbol. Here, the first main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-A, the second main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-B, and the auxiliary game winning / failing lottery means MN11-H are referred to when performing a winning / losing lottery regarding the first main game symbol. The first main game win / loss lottery table MN11ta-A, the second main game win / loss lottery table MN11ta-B referred to when performing the win / loss lottery for the second main game symbol, and the win / loss lottery for the auxiliary game symbol. Each has a winning / losing lottery table MN11ta-H for auxiliary games, which is referred to when performing the above. An example of a detailed table configuration will be described later.

Next, the symbol content determining means MN40 acquires the first main game symbol determining means MN41-A that determines the stop symbol of the first main game symbol based on the acquired game content determining random number (first main game random number). The second main game symbol determination means MN41-B that determines the stop symbol of the second main game symbol based on the game content determination random number (second main game random number), and the auxiliary game symbol based on the acquired auxiliary game symbol winning random number It has an auxiliary game symbol determining means MN41-H, which determines the stop symbol of.

Here, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A has a first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A that is referred to when determining a stop symbol related to the first main game symbol. The first main game symbol lottery table MN41ta-A includes various lottery tables that differ depending on the result of winning or failing. Further, the second main game symbol determination means MN41-B has a second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B that is referred to when determining a stop symbol related to the second main game symbol. The second main game symbol lottery table MN41ta-B is provided with various lottery tables that differ depending on the result of winning or failing. Further, the auxiliary game symbol determination means MN41-H has an auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H that is referred to when determining a stop symbol related to the auxiliary game symbol, and the auxiliary game symbol determination lottery. The table MN41ta-H is provided with various winning tables that differ depending on the gaming state. An example of a detailed table configuration will be described later.

Next, the variation mode determining means MN50 determines the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the first main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (first main game random number). The MN51-A, the second main game variation mode determining means MN51-B that determines the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the second main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (second main game random number), and It has an auxiliary game variation mode determining means MN51-H that determines a variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the auxiliary game symbol based on the acquired auxiliary game symbol winning random number.

Here, the first main game variation mode determining means MN51-A has a first main game variation mode determining lottery table MN51ta-A that is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the first main game symbol. The lottery table MN51ta-A for determining the first main game variation mode is provided with various lottery tables that differ depending on the result of success or failure and the game state. Further, the second main game variation mode determining means MN51-B has a second main game variation mode determining lottery table MN51ta-B that is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the second main game symbol. The second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B includes various lottery tables that differ depending on the result of winning or failing and the game state. An example of a detailed table configuration will be described later. Further, the auxiliary game variation mode determining means MN51-H has a lottery table MN51ta-H for determining the auxiliary game variation mode, which is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the auxiliary game symbol, and the auxiliary game variation mode is determined. The decision lottery table MN51ta-H is provided with various winning tables that differ depending on the game state (for example, normal game → auxiliary game normal lottery table, probability variation game and time reduction game → auxiliary game time reduction lottery table. ).

Next, the display control means MP10 is placed on the first main game symbol display unit A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 and on the second main game symbol display unit B21g of the second main game symbol display device B20 for a predetermined time. Assistance for a predetermined time on the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C, which controls the stop display after changing the first main game symbol, and the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g of the auxiliary game symbol display device H20. It has an auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H that controls to stop and display after changing the game symbol.

Here, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C is a zero-clearable first and second main game symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-C (for example, a decrement counter that is subtracted at predetermined intervals. , Hereinafter, something similar to a timer can be implemented with a similar counter). Further, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H further includes an auxiliary game symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-H capable of measuring time.

Next, in order to determine whether or not the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B satisfies the conditions for opening / closing the second main game start port electric accessory B11d. 2nd main game start port electric accessory opening / closing condition determination means MP21-B and 2nd main game start port electric accessory opening timer MP22t for measuring the drive (opening) time of the electric accessory B11d -B and the game ball remaining in the second main game start port electric accessory B11d after the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is closed are detected by the second main game start port entry ball detection device B11s. It has a second main game start port entry standby timer MP22t2, which measures the waiting time until the time is reached.

Next, the special game control means MP30 has the condition determination means MP31 for determining whether or not the condition for shifting to the special game is satisfied, and the content of the special game when the special game transition condition is satisfied. (Specifically, the special game content determination means MP32, which determines the open large winning opening, the number of rounds, the time between rounds, etc.) and sets it in the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the first big prize. A special game execution means MP33 for executing a special game (big hit) that opens the mouth C10 or the second big prize opening C20 under a predetermined condition, and time management of various processes related to the special game (for example, the first big prize mouth). It has a special game time management means MP34 for performing the opening / closing time of C10 and the second prize opening C20), and a distribution game execution control means MP36 for executing the distribution game. Here, the special game execution means MP33 includes the first and second large winning opening electric accessory opening / closing control means MP33-C for opening and closing the first large winning opening electric accessory C11d and the second large winning opening electric accessory C21d. , It has a winning ball counter MP33c for measuring winning balls to the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20. The special game time management means MP34 includes a special game timer MP34t that manages the round time, an opening timer MP34t2 that clocks the opening time of the big winning opening, and a first big winning opening C10 (or a second big winning opening C20). The game ball remaining in the first big winning opening C10 (or the second big winning opening C20) after closing is detected by the first big winning opening winning detection device C11s (or the second big winning opening winning detection device C21s). It also has a large winning opening ball entry standby timer MP34t3, which measures the waiting time until the time is reached. Further, the special game content determining means MP32 further has a special game content reference table MP32ta that is referred to when specifying the content of the special game to be set in the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b (table). Although the details of the above are not shown, it is a table in which the large winning openings to be opened, the maximum number of rounds, the execution contents of one round, etc. are defined. In addition, the first round is executed after the special game is started. The start demo time, which is the waiting time until the game is played, the end demo time, which is the waiting time from the end of the final round to the end of the special game, etc., are also predetermined in this table).

Next, the specific game control means MP50 determines whether or not the probability variation end condition determining means MP51 for determining whether or not the end condition of the probability variation game state is satisfied and whether or not the end condition of the time shortened game state is satisfied. It has a time saving end condition determination means MP52 for determination. Each has a time reduction counter MP52c capable of counting the time reduction number. Here, the probability-variable gaming state means a gaming state in which the winning probability at the time of winning / failing lottery for the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is higher than the non-probability-variable gaming state, and the time-shortening gaming state. Is that the average value of the fluctuation time of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol becomes shorter than the non-time shortened gaming state, and / or the second main game start port electric accessory per unit time. It means a gaming state in which the ease of opening of B11d is improved.

Here, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is relatively shortened (time reduction) during the time reduction game as compared with the non-time reduction game. function). Further, the auxiliary game symbol becomes a hit symbol with a high probability, the fluctuation time of the auxiliary game symbol is relatively shortened, and the opening extension time of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is relatively extended ( Opening time extension function). Further, the time reduction game in the present embodiment ends when the total value of the number of fluctuations of the first main game symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second main game symbol exceeds a predetermined number of times (probability variation game with no time reduction limit). except for). That is, the number of time reductions is configured to be subtracted for each change (stop) of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. The probability variation end condition determination means MP51 and the time reduction end condition determination means MP52, for example, perform a transition lottery from a specific game (for example, a probability variation game or a time reduction game) to a normal game with a predetermined probability each time the symbol changes. It may have a function (in the case of a so-called pachinko gaming machine having a fall lottery function).

Next, the game state temporary storage means MB uses the first main game (the game from the change of the first main game symbol to the stop) and the second main game (the game from the change of the second main game symbol to the stop). The first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C for temporarily storing the current game state in the game) and the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-C for temporarily storing the current game state in the auxiliary game. Special game-related information temporary storage means for temporarily storing H and the current game state in the special game (for example, the number of rounds, the number of winning game balls in any round, on / off of various flags related to the special game, etc.) It has an MB20b and a specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b for temporarily storing the current game state in the specific game (for example, the remaining number of time reductions, on / off of various flags related to the specific game, etc.). ..

Here, the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C is stopped related to the first or second main game symbol (the first or second main game symbol in which the change start condition is satisfied) that is currently changing. It has the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C for temporarily storing the symbol and the variation mode information.

Further, the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H temporarily stores information such as a stop symbol related to the currently changing auxiliary game symbol (auxiliary game symbol for which the change start condition is satisfied). It has means MB11b-H.

Next, the prize ball payout determination means MH is a payout information transmission / reception means MHsj (and transmission / reception) for transmitting / receiving information related to prize ball payout (and error detection or fraud detection) with the prize ball payout control board KH side. The payout command temporary storage means MHsjb) that temporarily stores the information, the prize ball count counter MHc for counting the total number of prize balls based on the entry of the game balls, and the payout of the prize balls have not been completed (prize ball payout). It has an unpaid prize ball information temporary storage means MHb for temporarily storing information related to unpaid prize balls (which has not received information related to payout completion from the control board KH side).

Next, game peripherals will be described. Since the detailed configurations of some peripheral devices have already been described, the remaining configurations will be briefly described. First, the game peripherals include a first main game peripheral device A which is a peripheral device on the first main game side, a second main game peripheral device B which is a peripheral device on the second main game side, and a first main game side. The first and second main game shared peripheral devices C, which are the shared peripheral devices on the second main game side, the auxiliary game peripheral device H related to the auxiliary game, the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM, and the sub-sub control unit. It has SS (and effect display device SG) and the like. Here, the effect controlled by the sub-main control unit SM includes the variation of the first main game symbol and the variation of the second main game symbol and the variation of the decorative symbol in a time-synchronized manner, and the result of the game. It is related to the display of only information that does not affect. Hereinafter, these peripheral devices will be described in order.

First, the first main game peripheral device A includes a first main game start port A10 that triggers a transition to a special game, and a first main game symbol display device A20 capable of stopping display and variable display of the first main game symbol. ,have. Regarding the first main game start port A10, the first main game start port entry detection device A11s for detecting the entry into the first main game start port A10 and the entry ball are normal. It has a first main game start port confirmation sensor A11s2 for confirming the presence of the ball, and only at one of the entry ports (particularly, only with the first main game start port entry detection device A11s). When is detected, it is configured to execute processing related to fraudulent activity or error occurrence (details will be described later). In addition, when double-checking the incoming ball using two sensors in this way, sensors with different detection mechanisms (for example, a non-contact type photo sensor and a contact type physical switch) should be used in combination. However, it is suitable for detecting fraudulent activity.

Next, the second main game peripheral device B has a second main game start port B10 that triggers the transition to the special game, and a second main game symbol display device B20 capable of stopping display and variable display of the second main game symbol. And have.

Next, the first and second main game shared peripheral devices C are in a closed state during a normal game, and are opened under a predetermined condition during a special game (big hit). And the second major winning opening C20, the general winning opening P10 in which the game ball is paid out when the game ball wins, and the entry status display device capable of displaying the entry status to various entry openings. From J10, the out port C80 for taking in the game ball that did not enter the inner start port or the winning opening of the game ball launched into the game area D30 into the game machine, and the start port, the entry port, and the out port C80. It is provided on a path for discharging the game balls taken into the game machine to the outside of the game machine, and has a total discharge confirmation sensor C90s for detecting the game balls discharged from the game machine.

Next, the auxiliary game peripheral device H has an auxiliary game start port H10 that triggers the opening of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10, and a stop display and a variable display of the auxiliary game symbol. It has an auxiliary game symbol display device H20 capable of the above.

Next, the effect display control means (sub-main control unit) SM has a display information receiving means SM10 for receiving various information from the main control board M side, and a process of determining the effect content and a display control process related to the effect display. It has an effect display control means SM20 that controls the above, an error notification control means SM30 that controls error notification when an error occurs, and an information transmission / reception control means SM40 that controls information transmission / reception with the sub-sub control unit SS side. Hereinafter, each of the above means will be described in detail.

First, the display information receiving means SM10 has a main side information temporary storage means SM11b for temporarily storing symbol information and display instruction information related to the first main game and the second main game from the main control board M side. ..

Next, the effect display control means SM20 includes the decorative symbol display control means SM21 that controls the change mode of the decorative symbol, the stop symbol determination process, and the display control process, and the design hold that controls the reserved number management and the hold display process of the decorative symbol. The information display control means SM22, the background effect display control means SM23 that controls the background image determination process and the display control process, the notice effect display control means SM24 that controls the advance notice effect content determination process and the display control process, and the reach effect content. It has a reach effect display control means SM25 that controls a determination process and a display control process.

Next, the error notification control means SM30 has an error occurrence determination means SM31 for determining the presence or absence of an error occurrence.

Here, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 relates to the design display content determining means SM21n for determining the stop symbol and the variation mode of the decorative symbol based on the information from the main control board M side, and the symbol variation of the decorative symbol. A design display related information temporary storage means SM21b for temporarily storing various information (variation mode information, stop symbol information, various flags, etc.), and a design fluctuation time management timer SM21t for measuring the fluctuation time of a decorative symbol. ,have. Here, the marking display content determining means SM21n further has a drawing variation content determination lottery (reference) table SM21ta that is referred to when determining the stop symbol and the variation mode of the decorative symbol (details of the table). Is not shown).

Next, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 has a drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b for temporarily storing information related to the reservation related to the decorative symbol.

Next, the background effect display control means SM23 is displayed on the back side of the decorative pattern based on the information from the main control board M side, and the possibility of executing the special game based on the information regarding the hold. It has a background effect display content determining means SM23n for determining the display content of the effect), and a background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b for temporarily storing information related to the background effect display.

Next, the advance notice effect display control means SM24 is displayed during the change display of the decorative pattern based on the information from the main control board M side, and is expected to shift to the special game in the change. To temporarily store information related to the advance notice effect display content determination means SM24n, which determines the display content and display timing of the special game (the effect of suggesting and notifying the feasibility of the special game based on the information regarding the hold) It has a temporary storage means SM24b for information related to the advance notice effect.

Next, the reach effect display control means SM25 is in a reach state based on the information from the main control board M side, depending on the combination of the reach effect (mainly displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol and the stop-displayed decorative symbol). It is an effect that is executed after being notified that it has become, but it also includes an effect that is executed in conjunction with the variable display of the decorative symbol even if it is not in the reach state). It has a reach effect display content determining means SM25n to be determined, and a reach effect related information temporary storage means SM25b for temporarily storing information related to the reach effect display.

Next, the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is an image that displays an image on the sub-information transmission / reception control means SS10 that controls information transmission / reception with the sub-main control unit SM side and the display area SG10 on the effect display device SG. It has a display control means SS20. Here, the image display control means SS20 further includes an image display-related information temporary storage means SS21b for temporarily storing commands received from the sub-main control unit SM side and information related to various image displays.

Further, the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is electrically connected to the effect display device SG that displays an image related to the effect based on the information from the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS. Here, the effect display device SG has a display area SG10 for displaying an image.

Here, the display area SG10 has a decorative symbol display area SG11 for variablely displaying the decorative symbol, and a first hold display unit SG12 (and a second hold display unit SG13) for displaying the main game hold information. ing.

The first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are connected to the main control board M so as to be able to transmit information, and the remaining effect display means (sub-sub control unit). ) SS is connected to the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM so as to be able to transmit information. That is, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are controlled by the main control board M, and the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS controls the sub-game. Means (sub-main control unit) It means that it is controlled by SM. The main control board M may be configured to control another peripheral device via another peripheral device controlled by one-way communication (one-way communication).

Next, FIG. 8 is a main flowchart showing a general flow of processing performed by the main control board M. After the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the process shown in FIG. That is, after the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the initial settings are performed (although not shown, the registers are initialized, the input / output ports are set, etc.), and in step 1002, the main control board M has a RAM clear button. Whether or not the reset button (RAM clear button) of the power supply unit E was operated by checking the input port of, that is, whether or not the operation to intentionally clear the contents of the RAM was performed by the administrator of the game hall or the like. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1002, in step 1004, the main control board M clears all the RAM contents (for example, information in the game state temporary storage means MB) on the main control board M side. Next, in step 1006, the information transmission control means MT transmits ram clear information (command) indicating that the RAM of the main control board M has been cleared to the sub-main control unit SM side (even if it is transmitted at the relevant timing). Alternatively, at that timing, a command may be set and transmitted by a control command transmission process described later), and the process proceeds to step 1016. On the other hand, if No in step 1002, in step 1008, the main control board M checks the contents of the RAM area in the main control board M (for example, it is stored in the checksum and the RAM area recorded at the time of power failure. Compare with the amount of information available). Next, in step 1010, the main control board M determines whether or not the contents of the RAM are normal (whether or not the information at the time of power failure is accurately backed up in the RAM) based on the check result. If Yes in step 1010, that is, the data backed up in the RAM is abnormal, the process proceeds to the process of step 1004 (the RAM clear process described above). On the other hand, if No in step 1010, that is, the data backed up in the RAM is normal, in step 1012, the main control board M is stored (backed up) in the RAM of the main control board M in various ways at the time of power failure. The information command is acquired, and in step 1014, the acquired various information commands are transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side (may be transmitted at the relevant timing, or the command is set at the relevant timing and the control command described later is set. It may be configured to transmit in the transmission process), and the process proceeds to step 1016. Next, in step 1016, the main control board M is triggered by an execution scheduled interrupt (for example, a hardware interrupt every about 1.5 ms) related to the main process on the main control board M side shown in FIG. However, in this example, the interrupt cycle is T), {as a result, when the execution scheduled interrupt timing is reached, the figure (b) is executed}, and the process proceeds to step 1018. .. After step 1018, the main control board M repeatedly executes various random number update processes (for example, random number counter increment processes) until the next scheduled interrupt timing is reached.

Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The main control board M executes the process of FIG. 3B based on the interrupt request generated when the scheduled interrupt timing is reached. That is, when the scheduled interrupt cycle T is reached (for example, a hardware interrupt every about 1.5 ms), in step 2000, the main control board M executes the ball entry detection process described later. Next, in step 1100, the main control board M executes the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process described later. Next, in step 1200, the main control board M executes the electric accessory drive determination process described later. Next, in step 1300, the main control board M executes the main game content determination random number acquisition process described later. Next, in step 1400, the main control board M executes the main game symbol display process described later. Next, in step 1500, the main control board M executes the special game operation condition determination process described later. Next, in step 1600, the main control board M executes the special game control process described later. Next, in step 2100, the main control board M executes the ball entry number determination process described later. Next, in step 1900, the main control board M executes the fraud detection information management process. Next, in step 1950, the main control board M executes the error management process described later. Next, in step 3000, the main control board M executes the prize ball payout command transmission control process described later. Next, in step 3500, the main control board M executes an external signal output process (information output to an external terminal board, a hall computer HC, etc.), which will be described later. Next, in step 1990, the main control board M executes a control command transmission process (transmits the command set in each of the above processes to the sub-main control unit side), and is executed immediately before the execution of this interrupt process. It returns to the processing that was done.

Next, NMI interrupt processing will be described. As described above, the main control board M is configured so that the power interruption signal from the reset IC is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU, and the processing shown in FIG. Will be done. That is, when the power of the gaming machine is turned off (in this example, when the NMI is interrupted), in step 1020, the main control board M sets the power cut information (for example, checksum) based on the information in the RAM area. Next, in step 1022, the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area, prohibits timer interrupt processing, and shifts to power cutoff waiting loop processing.

Next, FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the ball entry detection process according to the subroutine of step 2000 in FIG. First, in step 2150, the ball entry determination means executes the auxiliary game start port entry ball detection process, which will be described later. Next, in step 2200, the ball entry determination means executes the main game start port entry ball detection process, which will be described later. Next, in step 2350, the ball entry determination means executes the first (second) large winning opening ball entry detection process described later. Next, in step 2400, the ball entry determination means executes the general winning opening ball entry detection process described later. Next, in step 2500, the ball entry determination means executes the discharge ball detection process described later. Next, in step 2600, the ball entry determination means executes the out-port entry ball detection process described later. Next, in step 2700, the ball entry determination means executes the prize ball determination process described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1100).

Next, FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game start port entry ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2150 in FIG. First, in step 2152, the auxiliary game start port entry determination means MJ11-H refers to the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and determines whether or not the auxiliary game start opening detection continuation flag is off. To do. In the case of Yes in step 2152, in step 2154, the auxiliary game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-H receives the input from the auxiliary game start port entry ball detection device H11s for the ball entry detection time (the time or more, the auxiliary game start port). When the ball entry detection device H11s detects the input, it is determined whether or not it is ON for more than the time (time when it is considered that the ball has entered the auxiliary game start port H10). In the case of Yes in step 2154, in step 2156, the auxiliary game start port entry determination means MJ11-H turns on the auxiliary game start flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, in step 2158, the auxiliary game start port entry determination means MJ11-H turns on the auxiliary game start opening detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and performs the next process ( The process proceeds to step 2200).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2152, in step 2160, the auxiliary game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-H receives the input from the auxiliary game start opening ball entry detection device H11s for the detection end time (the auxiliary game start for the time or more). When the mouth-entry ball detection device H11s does not detect the input, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than the time (time when it is considered that the game ball has completed passing through the auxiliary game start mouth-entry ball detection device H11s). In the case of Yes in step 2160, in step 2162, the auxiliary game start port entry determination means MJ11-H turns off the auxiliary game start opening detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. The process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2200). Even if No in step 2154 or 2160, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2200).

Next, FIG. 11 is a flowchart of the main game start opening ball entry detection process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. First, in step 2202, the first main game start port entry determination means MJ11-A refers to the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and determines whether or not the first main game start opening detection continuation flag is off. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2202, in step 2204, the first main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-A inputs from the first main game start opening ball entry detection device A11s the ball entry detection time (the time or more, When the first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s detects an input, it is determined whether or not the first main game start port (time for determining that the ball has entered the first main game start port A10) is ON. In the case of Yes in step 2204, in step 2206, the first main game start port entry determination means MJ11-A turns on the first main game start flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. To do. Next, in step 2210, the first main game start port entry determination means MJ11-A turns on the first main game start opening detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. ..

Next, in step 2212-1, in the first main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-A, the current game state is a non-probability variable game state and a non-time shortened game state (the main game probability change flag is off and the main game). It is determined whether or not the time saving flag is off). The non-time reduction game state may be the case where the main game time reduction flag is off, or the auxiliary game time reduction flag may be off (when the open extension function of the electric accessory is not activated). Further, the time shortening game state may be the case where the main game time reduction flag is on, or the auxiliary game time reduction flag may be on (when the opening extension function of the electric accessory is activated). Ye in step 2212-1
In the case of s, in step 2212-2, the first main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-A determines whether or not the special game is currently being executed (condition device operation flag is off). In the case of Yes in step 2212-2, in step 2212-3, the first main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-A adds (increments) 1 to the counter value of the start opening entry number counter MJ12c, and steps. Move to 2222.

On the other hand, if No in step 2202, in step 2213, the input from the ball entry counter MJ10c is the detection time (when the first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s does not detect the input for that time or longer, the game It is determined whether or not the ball is OFF for the time (time when it is considered that the ball has completed passing through the first main game start port entry detection device A11s) or more. Next, in step 2214, the first main game start port entry determination means MJ11-A turns off the first main game start opening detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. .. Next, in step 2215, the first main game start port entry determination means MJ11-A turns off the first main game start opening long-time detection flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. , Step 2222. In addition, even if No in step 2204, step 2212-1, step 2212-2, or step 2213, the process proceeds to step 2222.

Next, in step 2222, the second main game start port entry determination means MJ11-B refers to the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and whether or not the second main game start opening detection continuation flag is off. To judge. In the case of Yes in step 2222, in step 2224, the second main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-B receives the input from the second main game start opening ball entry detection device B11s as the ball entry detection time (more than that time, When the second main game start port entry ball detection device B11s detects an input, it is determined whether or not the second main game start port B10 is ON for more than the time (time when it is considered that there was a ball entry). In the case of Yes in step 2224, in step 2225, the second main game start port entry determination means MJ11-B refers to the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and the flag is turned on during the valid period of the second main game start opening. It is determined whether or not it is. In the case of Yes in step 2225, in step 2226, the second main game start port entry determination means MJ11-B turns on the second main game start flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. .. Next, in step 2230, the second main game start port entry determination means MJ11-B turns on the second main game start opening detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. ..

Next, in step 2231-1, in the second main game start port entry determination means MJ11-B, the current game state is a non-probability variable game state and a non-time shortened game state (the main game probability change flag is off and the main game). It is determined whether or not the time saving flag is off). In the case of Yes in step 2231-1, in step 2231-2, whether or not the second main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-B is not currently executing the special game (condition device operation flag is off). Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2231-2, in step 2231-3, the second main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-B adds (increments) 1 to the counter value of the start opening entry number counter MJ12c, and steps. Move to 2240. As described above, in the present embodiment, the non-probability variation game state and the non-time reduction game state (the main game probability change flag is off and the main game time reduction flag is off), and the special game is not being executed (conditional device). When the game ball enters the first main game start port A10 or the second main game start port B10 when the operation flag is off), 1 is added to the counter value of the start port entry number counter MJ12c. It is configured.

On the other hand, if No in step 2225 (when the entry of the game ball is detected during the period when the entry into the second main game start opening B10 is not valid), the entry of the second main game start opening is determined in step 2232. Means MJ11-B determines that there was an illegal entry into the second main game start port B10, sets an illegal entry command for the second main game start port (command to the sub-control board S side), and steps 2240. Move to. In addition, step 2231-1, step 2231-2 or step 222.
In the case of No in 4, the process proceeds to step 2240.

On the other hand, if No in step 2222, in step 2233, the second main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-B receives the input from the second main game start opening ball detection device B11s for the detection time (more than that time, When the second main game start opening ball entry detection device B11s does not detect the input, whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than (the time when it is considered that the game ball has passed through the second main game start opening ball entry detection device B11s) or more. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2233, in step 2234, the second main game start port entry determination means MJ11-B is in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and the second main game start opening detection continuation flag. Turn off. Next, in step 2238, the second main game start port entry determination means MJ11-B turns off the second main game start opening long-time detection flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. , Step 2240. Even if No in step 2233, the process proceeds to step 2240.

Next, in step 2240, the first main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-A (second main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-B) is the first main game start opening ball entry detection device A11s (first). 2 Whether or not the main game start port entry ball detection device B11s) is ON for more than the fraud detection time (the time exceeding the time detected as a normal ball entry and the time for determining that fraud is being performed). Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2240, in step 2242, the first main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-A (second main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-B) is the ball entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. The first (second) main game start port long-time detection flag in the flag area is turned on, and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2350). On the other hand, even if No in step 2240, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2350).

Next, FIG. 12 is a flowchart of the first (second) grand prize opening ball entry detection process according to the subroutine of step 2350 in FIG. First, in step 2352, the first prize-winning opening ball entry determination means MJ11-C10 (second prize-winning opening ball entry determination means MJ11-C20) refers to the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and the first 1 (2nd) It is determined whether or not the large winning opening detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2352, in step 2354, the first large winning opening winning ball determination means MJ11-C10 (second large winning opening entrance ball determination means MJ11-C20) is the first large winning opening winning detection device C11s (first). Whether the input from the two major winning openings (C21s) is ON for more than the entry detection time (the time when the entry detection device detects the input for that time or longer, it is considered that the entry has been made at the entry opening). Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2354, in step 2355, the first prize-winning opening ball entry determination means MJ11-C10 (second prize-winning opening ball entry determination means MJ11-C20) refers to the ball entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. , It is determined whether or not the flag is on during the valid period of the first (second) large winning opening. In the case of Yes in step 2355, in step 2356, the first prize-winning opening ball entry determination means MJ11-C10 (second prize-winning opening ball entry determination means MJ11-C20) is the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Turn on the 1st (2nd) Grand Prize Opening Ball entry flag inside. Next, in step 2360, the first prize-winning opening ball entry determination means MJ11-C10 (second prize-winning opening ball entry determination means MJ11-C20) is in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. The first (second) grand prize opening detection continuation flag is turned on, and the process proceeds to step 2370.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2355 (when the entry of the game ball is detected during the period when the entry into the large winning opening is not valid), in step 2361, the first large winning opening entry determination means MJ11-C10 ( The second large winning opening illegal entry determination means MJ11-C20) determines that there was an illegal entry in the large winning opening, and the first (second) large winning opening illegal entry command (to the sub-control board S side). Command) is set, and the process proceeds to step 2370. Even if No in step 2354, the process proceeds to step 2320.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2352, in step 2362, the first large winning opening winning ball determination means MJ11-C10 (second large winning opening winning ball determination means MJ11-C20) is the first large winning opening winning detection device C11s. The input from (2nd prize opening prize detection device C21s) is the detection time {when the 1st prize opening prize detection device C11s (2nd prize opening prize detection device C21s) does not detect the input for that time or more. , It is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for the time when it is considered that the game ball has completed passing through the first special winning opening winning detection device C11s (second large winning opening winning detection device C21s)} or more. In the case of Yes in step 2362, in step 2364, the first prize-winning opening ball entry determination means MJ11-C10 (second prize-winning opening ball entry determination means MJ11-C20) is the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Turn off the 1st (2nd) winning opening detection continuation flag inside. Next, in step 2368, the first prize-winning opening ball entry determination means MJ11-C10 (second prize-winning opening ball entry determination means MJ11-C20) is located in the flag area of the ball entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. 1 (2nd) Grand prize opening The long-time detection flag is turned off, and the process proceeds to step 2370.

Next, in step 2370, the first large winning opening winning determination means MJ11-C10 (second large winning opening entry determining means MJ11-C20) uses the first large winning opening winning detection device C11s (second large winning opening). Input from the prize detection device C21s) is fraudulent detection time {If the first prize opening prize detection device C11s (second prize opening prize detection device C21s) detects the input for that time or longer, the first prize opening C10 It is determined whether or not it is ON for more than the time when it is considered that an illegal entry into the (second prize opening C20) is detected}. In the case of Yes in step 2370, in step 2372, the first prize-winning opening ball entry determination means MJ11-C10 (second prize-winning opening ball entry determination means MJ11-C20) is the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. The first (second) big winning opening long-time detection flag in the inside is turned on, and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2400). On the other hand, even if No in step 2370, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2400).

Next, FIG. 13 is a flowchart of the general winning opening winning ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. The general winning opening P10 is an entry opening that pays out the prize ball when the game ball enters, but does not affect the progress of the game, and is a sensor that detects the entry of the game ball. The winning opening ball entry detection device P11s is provided. Further, the ball entry determination means MJ10 has general winning opening ball entry determination means P11s for determining whether or not a ball has entered the general winning opening.

First, in step 2402, the general winning opening detection continuation flag MJ11-P refers to the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b and determines whether or not the general winning opening detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2402, in step 2404, the general winning opening ball entry determination means MJ11-P receives the input from the general winning opening entry ball detection device for the entry detection time (the time or more, the general winning opening entry ball detection device). When the input is detected, it is determined whether or not it is ON for more than the time (time when it is considered that there is a ball in the general winning opening). In the case of Yes in step 2404, in step 2406, the general winning opening ball entry determination means MJ11-P turns on the general winning opening ball entry flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, in step 2410, the general winning opening entry determination means MJ11-P turns on the general winning opening detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, in step 2411-1, in the general winning opening ball entry determination means MJ11-P, the current game state is a non-probability variable game state and a non-time reduction game state (the main game probability change flag is off and the main game time reduction flag is set. Off) is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2411-1, in step 2411-2, the general winning opening ball entry determination means MJ11-P determines whether or not the special game is currently being executed (condition device operation flag is off). To do. In the case of Yes in step 2411-2, in step 2411-3, the general winning opening ball entry determination means MJ11-P adds (increments) 1 to the counter value of the general winning number counter MJ13c, and proceeds to step 2420. .. On the other hand, if No in step 2402, in step 2412, the general winning opening ball entry determination means MJ11-P receives the input from the general winning opening entry ball detection device for the entry detection time (the time or more, the general winning opening entry ball). When the detection device does not detect the input, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than the time (time when it is considered that the game ball has completed passing through the general winning opening ball entry detection device). In the case of Yes in step 2412, in step 2414, the general winning opening ball entry determination means MJ11-P turns off the general winning opening detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, in step 2418, the general winning opening entry determination means turns off the general winning opening long-time detection flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and proceeds to step 2420. In addition, even if No in step 2404, step 2411-1, 2411-2 or step 2412, the process proceeds to step 2420. As described above, in the present embodiment, the non-probability variation game state and the non-time reduction game state (the main game probability change flag is off and the main game time reduction flag is off), and the special game is not being executed (conditional device). When the game ball enters the general winning opening P10 when the operation flag is off), 1 is added to the counter value of the general winning number counter MJ13c.

Next, in step 2420, in the general winning opening ball entry determination means MJ11-P, the input from the general winning opening entry ball detection device is invalid detection time {the general winning opening ball entry detection device has detected the input for the time or more. In this case, it is determined whether or not the time is ON for the time when it is considered that an illegal entry into the general winning opening is detected}. In the case of Yes in step 2420, in step 2422, the general winning opening ball entry determination means MJ11-P turns on the general winning opening long-time detection flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and then (Processing in step 2500). Even if No in step 2420, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2500).

Next, FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the discharge ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. First, in step 2502, the total discharge confirmation means MJ11-C90 refers to the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and determines whether or not the discharge confirmation detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2502, in step 2504, the total discharge confirmation means MJ11-C90 receives the input from the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s for the ball entry detection time (when the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s detects the input for that time or longer). It is determined whether or not the discharge confirmation sensor C90s is ON for more than the time it is considered that the ball has entered. In the case of Yes in step 2504, in step 2506, the total discharge confirmation means MJ11-C90 turns on the discharge confirmation detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, in step 2508, the total discharge ball confirmation means MJ11-C90 adds (increments) 1 to the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2600).

On the other hand, if No in step 2502, in step 2510, the total discharge confirmation means MJ11-C90 detects the input from the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s at the detection end time (the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s detects the input for the time or more). If not, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than the time (time when it is considered that the game ball has completed passing through the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s). In the case of Yes in step 2510, in step 2512, the total discharge confirmation means MJ11-C90 turns off the discharge confirmation detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, in step 2514, the total discharge confirmation means MJ11-C90 turns off the discharge confirmation long-time detection flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and the next process (process of step 2600). ). Even if No in step 2504 or step 2510, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2600).

Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the out-port / in-ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2600 in FIG. First, in step 2602, the out-mouth entry / exit determining means MJ11-C80 refers to the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and determines whether or not the out-mouth entry detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2602, in step 2604, in the out-mouth entry ball detection means MJ11-C80, the input from the out-mouth entry ball detection device C80s is the entry detection time (the time or more, the out-mouth entry ball detection device C80s When the input is detected, it is determined whether or not the ball is ON for more than the time it is considered that the ball has entered the out port C80. In the case of Yes in step 2604, in step 2606, the out-port entry ball determination means MJ11-C80 turns on the out-port detection continuation flag in the flag area of the ball entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and the process of step 2620. Move to.

On the other hand, if No in step 2602, in step 2610, the out-port entry ball detection means MJ11-C80 receives the input from the out-port entry ball detection device C80s for the detection end time (the time or more, the out-port entry ball detection device C80s If no input is detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than the time (time when it is considered that the game ball has completed passing through the out-mouth / in-ball detection device C80s). In the case of Yes in step 2610, in step 2612, the out-port entry / exit determining means MJ11-C80 turns off the out-outlet detection continuation flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, in step 2615, the out-port entry ball determination means MJ11-C80 turns off the out-port long-time detection flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and proceeds to step 2620. On the other hand, even if No in step 2604 or step 2610, the process proceeds to step 2620.

Next, in step 2620, the out-port entry ball detection means MJ11-C80 detects the input from the out-port entry ball detection device C80s for an illegal detection time (the out-port entry ball detection device C80s detects the input for that time or longer). If so, it is determined whether or not the ball is ON for more than the time (time when it is considered that an illegal entry into the out port C80 has been performed). In the case of Yes in step 2620, in step 2622, the out-port entry ball determination means MJ11-C80 turns on the out-port long-time detection flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and next processing (Processing in step 2700). On the other hand, even if No in step 2620, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2700).

Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the prize ball number determination process according to the subroutine of step 2700 in FIG. First, in step 2702, the prize ball payout determining means MH refers to the flag area of the ball entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and determines whether or not the first main game start flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2702, in step 2704, the prize ball payout determining means MH sets the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc to the number of prize balls paid out (3 in this example) related to the first main game start port A10. to add. Next, in step 2708, the prize ball payout determining means MH pays out the prize ball related to the first main game start port A10 to the unpaid prize ball information temporary storage means MHb (for example, the number of prize balls paid out). Information) is temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to step 2712. On the other hand, if No in step 2702, the process proceeds to step 2712.

Next, in step 2712, the prize ball payout determining means MH refers to the flag area of the ball entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and determines whether or not the second main game start flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2712, in step 2714, the prize ball payout determining means MH sets the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc to the number of prize balls paid out (3 in this example) related to the second main game start port B10. to add. Next, in step 2718, the prize ball payout determining means MH pays out the prize ball related to the second main game start port B10 to the unpaid prize ball information temporary storage means MHb (for example, the number of prize balls paid out). Information) is temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to step 2722. On the other hand, if No in step 2712, the process proceeds to step 2722.

Next, in step 2722, the prize ball payout determination means MH uses the ball entry-related information temporary storage means MJ.
With reference to the flag area of 10b, it is determined whether or not the first (second) grand prize opening ball entry flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2722, in step 2723, the prize ball payout determination means MH turns off the first (second) big prize opening ball entry flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. .. Next, in step 2724, the prize ball payout determination means MH sets the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc to the number of prize balls paid out related to the first prize ball opening C10 (second prize ball payout C20) (13 in this example). ) Is added. Next, in step 2728, the prize ball payout determination means MH pays out the prize ball related to the first prize ball opening C10 (second prize ball opening C20) to the unpaid prize ball information temporary storage means MHb. (For example, information on the number of prize balls paid out) is temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to step 2732. On the other hand, if No in step 2722, the process proceeds to step 2732.

Next, in step 2732, the prize ball payout determining means MH refers to the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and determines whether or not the general winning opening entry ball flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2732, in step 2733, the prize ball payout determination means MH turns off the general winning opening ball entry flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, in step 2734, the prize ball payout determining means MH adds the number of prize balls paid out (10 in this example) to the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc. Next, in step 2738, the prize ball payout determining means MH provides information to pay out the prize balls related to the general winning opening to the unpaid prize ball information temporary storage means MHb (for example, information related to the number of prize balls paid out). Is temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1100). On the other hand, even if No in step 2732, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1100). In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out at the first main game start port A10 and the number of prize balls paid out at the second main game start port B10 are the same three balls, but the present invention is not limited to this. The number of prize balls paid out may be changed. Specifically, for example, the number of prize balls paid out at the first main game starting port A10 may be changed to four balls, and when such a configuration is made, the number of prize balls paid out at the second main game starting port B10. May be 1 to 3 balls, which is smaller than the number of prize balls paid out at the first main game starting port A10.

Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. First, in step 1102, the auxiliary game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-H refers to the inside of the flag area of the ball entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and determines whether or not the auxiliary game start flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1102, in step 1103, the auxiliary game start port entry determination means MJ11-H turns off the auxiliary game start flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, in step 1104, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-H, and determines whether or not the hold balls are not the upper limit (for example, four). .. In the case of Yes in step 1104, in step 1106, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H acquires the auxiliary game content determination random number (for example, the auxiliary game symbol winning random number). Next, in step 1108, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H sets the random number in the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H together with the information on the number of the holding balls. Is added by 1, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1200). In addition, even if No in step 1102 and step 1104, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1200).

Next, FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the electric accessory drive determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1202, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing condition determining means MP21-B refers to the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H, and the electric accessory opening flag is off. Determine if it exists. In the case of Yes in step 1202, in step 1204, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing condition determination means MP21-B refers to the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H, and the auxiliary game symbol changing flag is set. Determine if it is off. If Yes in step 1204, step 12
At 06, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing condition determining means MP21-B accesses the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H and determines whether or not there is a holding ball related to the auxiliary game symbol. .. In the case of Yes in step 1206, in step 1216, the auxiliary game symbol determining means MN41-H refers to the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H to set the game state (flag state of the auxiliary game time reduction flag) on the auxiliary game side. At the same time as acquiring, the lottery table MN41ta-H for determining the auxiliary game symbol is referred to, and the stop symbol is determined based on the game state of the acquired auxiliary game side and the auxiliary game symbol random number based on the reserved ball (for example, the auxiliary game time reduction flag). When is on, the winning symbol is selected with a higher probability than when is off) and temporarily stored in the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H.

Here, the right side of the figure is an example of a lottery table for determining an auxiliary game stop symbol. As shown in the table, in this example, the stop symbols are "D0, D1, D2", and the stop symbols that are the hit symbols are "D1, D2", which are caused by the fact that each of them has stopped. In the non-time reduction game, when the stopped symbol is "D1", the opening mode is (opening for 0.2 seconds → closing), and the electric accessory is stopped. When the symbol is "D1, D2", the opening mode is (opening for 0.2 seconds → closing). Further, in the time reduction game, when the stopped symbol is "D1", the opening mode is (open for 1 second → closed for 1 second → open for 1 second → closed for 1 second → open for 1 second → closed) and stopped. When the symbol is "D2", the opening mode is configured to be (open for 0.2 seconds → closed for 0.8 seconds → open for 4.0 seconds → closed). It should be noted that the stop symbol is likely to be a lost symbol "D0" during the non-time reduction game, and the stop symbol is likely to be a hit symbol "D1" during the time reduction game.

Next, in step 1218, the auxiliary game variation mode determining means MN51-H sets the auxiliary game symbol to the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H based on the gaming state of the auxiliary game side (flag state of the auxiliary game time reduction flag). (For example, 1 second when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on, 10 seconds when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is off) is set. Then, in step 1220, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns on the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1222, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H updates the holding information recorded in the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H after subtracting 1 from the holding ball related to the auxiliary game symbol. At the same time, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H starts the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H, and then starts the auxiliary game symbol variation display on the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g.

Next, in step 1224, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H determines whether or not the predetermined time related to the fluctuation time of the auxiliary game symbol has been reached with reference to the auxiliary game symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-H. To do. In the case of Yes in step 1224, in step 1226, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H acquires the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol by referring to the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H, and the acquired auxiliary game symbol. The stop symbol of the game symbol is confirmed and displayed on the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g. Then, in step 1228, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns off the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H.

Next, in step 1230, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing condition determination means MP21-B determines whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is "hit" (D1 and D2 in this example). To judge. In the case of Yes in step 1230, in step 1232, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B is in an open mode (for example, in a time-reduced game) based on the hit symbol and the game state on the auxiliary game side. In the case of the hit symbol "D1", the opening mode is 1 second open → 1 second closed → 1 second open → 1 second closed → 1 second open → closed. In the case of the hit symbol “D2”, 0.2 A predetermined time related to the opening time (opening / closing time) of the electric accessory to the second main game start port electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B after determining the opening mode (opening mode of opening for seconds, closing for 0.8 seconds, opening for 5 seconds). To set. Next, in step 1234, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B turns on the electric accessory opening flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. .. Then, in step 1236, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B starts the second main game start port electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B, and then the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing timer MP20-B. Release the object B11d. Next, in step 1238, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing condition determination means MP21-B is in the flag area of the ball entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and is a flag during the valid period of the second main game start port. Is turned on, and the process proceeds to step 1242.

Next, in step 1242, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B refers to the second main game start port electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B to set the opening time of the electric accessory. It is determined whether or not the predetermined time has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1242, in step 1244 and step 1246, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B closes the second main game start port electric accessory B11d and temporarily assists the game state. Turn off the flag during opening of the electric accessory in the flag area of the storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1248, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing condition determination means MP21-B sets the second main game start port entry standby timer MP22t2 to the electric accessory entry standby time (3 in this example). Set seconds) and start. Next, in step 1250, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing condition determination means MP21-B refers to the second main game start port entry standby timer MP22t2, and whether or not the timer value is 0. To judge. In the case of Yes in step 1250, in step 1252, the second main game start port, the electric accessory opening / closing condition determination means MP21-B, is located in the flag area of the ball entry related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and the second main game start port. The flag is turned off during the valid period, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1300). As described above, in this example, the valid period of the second main game start port (the period during which the flag is on during the valid period of the second main game start port) is the opening timing of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d. From the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is closed until the electric accessory entry waiting time (3 seconds in this example) elapses, and the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is closed. However, it is configured to be able to wait for the entry of the game ball for the amount of the waiting time for the entry of the electric accessory.

If No in step 1202, the process proceeds to step 1242, if No in step 1204, the process proceeds to step 1224, and if No in step 1206, step 1224, step 1230, step 1240 or step 1250, the process proceeds to step 1224. The process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1300).

Further, in this flowchart, for convenience, after the stop symbol is displayed in step 1226, the process immediately proceeds to the next step, but the present invention is not limited to this. In that case, the process may be configured to move to the next process after the stop display fixed time of about 500 ms has elapsed (for example, this process is performed by performing branch processing using the stop display fixed flag and timer. Achievable).

Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. First, in step 1302, the first main game start port entry determination means MJ11-A refers to the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and determines whether or not the first main game start flag is on. judge. In the case of Yes in step 1302, in step 1304, the first main game start port entry determination means MJ11-A turns off the first main game start flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. To do. Next, in step 1306, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A refers to the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A, and holds the main game (particularly the first main game side). Determine if the number of spheres is not the upper limit (for example, 4). Ye in step 1306
In the case of s, in step 1308, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A acquires the first main game content determination random number. In this embodiment, as the first main game content determination random number, a winning / failing lottery random number for determining the winning / failing, a symbol lottery random number for determining the symbol at the time of winning, and a fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol are determined. Three random numbers of the variable mode lottery random numbers for the purpose are acquired. By the way, these three random numbers are generated from random number generation means having different update cycles and random number ranges, and are acquired in series at this timing. Next, in step 1310, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A temporarily stores (holds) the acquired first main game content determination random number in the first main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-A. .. Next, in step 1312, the hold control means MJ30 sets the acquired information (hold generation command) related to the first main game random number in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM (step 1990). It is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of (1), and the process proceeds to step 1322. On the other hand, even if No in step 1302 or 1306, the process proceeds to step 1322.

Next, in step 1322, the second main game start port entry determination means MJ11-B refers to the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and whether or not the second main game start flag is on. To judge. In the case of Yes in step 1322, in step 1324, the second main game start port entry determination means MJ11-B turns off the second main game start flag in the flag area of the entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. To do. Next, in step 1326, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B refers to the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and holds the main game (particularly the second main game side). Determine if the number of spheres is not the upper limit (for example, 4). In the case of Yes in step 1326, in step 1328, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B acquires the second main game content determination random number. In this embodiment, as the second main game content determination random number, three random numbers, a winning / fail lottery random number, a symbol lottery random number, and a variation mode lottery random number, are acquired as in the case of the first main game content determination random number. By the way, the acquisition range of each random number of the first main game content determination random number and the acquisition range of each random number of the second main game content determination random number (for example, the winning / failing lottery random number for the first main game and the winning / failing lottery random number for the second main game). Acquisition range) is set to the same. Next, in step 1330, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B temporarily stores (holds) the acquired second main game content determination random number in the second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B. .. Next, in step 1332, the hold control means MJ30 sets the acquired information (hold generation command) related to the second main game random number in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM (step 1990). (Transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1400). In addition, even if No in step 1322 or step 1326, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1400).

Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. First, in step 1401, the hold digestion control means MJ31 refers to the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and confirms whether or not the hold of the second main game symbol exists. In the case of Yes in step 1401, in step 1400 (1), the game content determining means MN executes the first main game symbol display process described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500). On the other hand, if No in step 1401, in step 1400 (2), the game content determining means MN executes the second main game symbol display process described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500).

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the holding ball of the second main game symbol exists, regardless of the existence of the holding ball of the first main game symbol (even if the winning order is the holding of the first main game symbol). It is configured to prioritize the hold digestion of the second main game symbol (even if it comes first), but it is not limited to this (hold digestion based on the winning order and both main game symbols are performed in parallel at the same time). It may be configured to execute a parallel lottery to draw a lottery).

Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. Since this processing is substantially the same for the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the processing on the second main game symbol side will be described. Write in parentheses. First, in step 1403, the reserved digestion control means MJ31 determines whether or not the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Here, the change start condition is a condition that the special game is not in progress (or the condition device is in operation), the main game symbol is not changing, and the main game symbol is held. Although not shown in this example, when a variable fixed time (time for stopping and displaying the confirmed display symbol after the final display of the main game symbol) is provided, the fluctuation start condition of the next fluctuation is set during the fixed variable time. May be configured so as not to satisfy.

In the case of Yes in step 1403, in step 1405 and step 1406, the hold digestion control means MJ31 becomes the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A (second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B). The first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) related to the current symbol change, which is temporarily stored, is read out, and the first main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A (second main game). It is deleted from the symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B), and the remaining information temporarily stored is shifted (hold digestion processing). Next, in step 1410-1 1 The main game symbol winning / failing lottery is executed based on the main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the winning lottery random number).

Here, FIG. 22 (main game table 1) is an example of the first main game winning / failing lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game winning / losing lottery table MN11ta-B). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability in the probability-variable gaming state is configured to be higher than the jackpot winning probability in the non-probability-variable gaming state. The winning probability is just an example, and is not limited to this. Further, in the present embodiment, a hit (so-called small hit) in which the gaming state cannot be changed is not illustrated, but a small hit may be generated (a small hit is won).

Next, in step 1410-2, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A (second main game symbol determination means MN41-B) uses the first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game symbol). With reference to the symbol lottery table MN41ta-B), the main game symbol is related based on the main game symbol winning / failing lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the symbol lottery random number). The stop symbols are determined, and these are temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C.

Here, FIG. 22 (main game table 2) is an example of the first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is won, from among a plurality of main game symbol candidates (in this example, "4A / 5A / 7A" and "4B / 5B / 7B"). It is configured so that one main game symbol is determined as a jackpot symbol. It should be noted that the random value and the type of the stop symbol are also examples, and are not limited to this. {For example, the lost symbol is not limited to one type of symbol, and a plurality of types of symbols are provided. When a specific symbol is stopped and displayed, the type and / or selection rate of the variation mode of the main game symbol is different from that before the specific symbol is stopped (limited frequency state). May be configured to migrate}.

Next, in step 1410-3, the first main game variation mode determining means MN51-A (second main game variation mode determining means MN51-B) is a lottery for determining the first main game variation mode corresponding to each game state. With reference to the table MN51ta-A (lottery table MN51ta-B for determining the second main game variation mode), the result of the main game symbol winning / failing lottery and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, variation). The variation mode of the main game symbol is determined based on the mode lottery random number), these are temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the process proceeds to step 1415.

Here, FIG. 22 (main game table 3) is an example of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the variation mode (variation time) of the main game symbol is determined based on the winning / failing lottery result of the main game symbol and the main game time reduction flag state. That is, when the winning / failing lottery result of the main game symbol is a hit, it is easy to determine the fluctuation mode in which the fluctuation time is relatively long, and when the main game time reduction flag is on (time reduction game state), it is relative. It is configured so that it is easy to determine the variation mode in which the variation time is short. It should be noted that this example is merely an example, and is not limited to the type of stop symbol, selection rate, or the like. Further, in the present embodiment, for convenience of explanation, it is not configured to have different tables according to the number of reserved balls, but it goes without saying that it may be configured to have different tables according to the number of reserved balls. Absent. Further, the symbol fluctuation time on the first main game side in the time-reduced game state (when the main game time reduction flag is on) may be configured to be relatively long {the symbol on the second main game side. When the execution of the fluctuation is configured to be advantageous to the player, the hold of the second main game side is likely to occur by lowering the symbol fluctuation efficiency of the first main game side (advantageous to the player). Since the purpose is to build a situation, it is particularly effective when the starting port on the first main game side and the starting port on the second main game side cannot be separated}.

Next, in step 1415, the game content determining means MN performs commands (stop symbol information, attribute information of the stop symbol) related to the main game symbol temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. , Fluctuation mode information, etc.) and commands related to the current game state (symbol variation display start instruction command) are set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM side (control command transmission process in step 1990). Is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side). Next, in step 1416, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sets a predetermined time related to the fluctuation time of the main game symbol in the first and second main game symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-C. To do. Next, in step 1417, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C is the first main game symbol display unit A21g (2nd main game symbol display device B20) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). On the second main game symbol display unit B21g), the variation display of the main game symbol is started according to the variation mode stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. Next, in step 1418, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turn on the changing flag in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C. The process proceeds to step 1420.

On the other hand, if No in step 1403, in step 1419, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refer to the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C and change. Determines if the medium flag is on. If Yes in step 1419, the process proceeds to step 1420, and if No in step 1419, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500).

Next, in step 1420, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C determine whether or not the predetermined time related to the fluctuation time of the main game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1420, in step 1422, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sends information (symbol confirmation display instruction command) to the sub-main control unit SM side to the effect that the symbol variation is completed. It is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1990). Next, in step 1423, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C is the first main game symbol display unit A21g (2nd main game symbol display device B20) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). Stops the variable display of the main game symbol on the second main game symbol display unit B21g), and displays the stop symbol stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C as a fixed stop symbol. Control. Next, in step 1424, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turn off the changing flag in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C. ..

Next, in step 1430, the game content determining means MN refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol. To do. In the case of Yes in step 1430, in step 1432, the game content determining means MN turns on the condition device operation flag in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. On the other hand, if No in step 1430, step 1432 is skipped.

Next, in step 1450, the specific game control means MP50 executes the specific game end determination process described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1500). Even if No in step 1420, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1500).

Next, FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination process according to the subroutine of step 1450 in FIG. First, in step 1452, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and determines whether or not the main game probability change flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1452, in step 1454, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the value of the time reduction counter MP52c and determines whether or not the counter value is larger than 0. In the case of Yes in step 1454, in step 1456, the specific game control means MP50 decrements the counter value of the time reduction counter MP52c by 1. Next, in step 1458, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the value of the time reduction counter MP52c, and determines whether or not the counter value (remaining time reduction number) is 0. In the case of Yes in step 1458, in step 1460 and step 1462, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game time reduction flag and the auxiliary game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and then turns off the next (Processing in step 1500). In addition, even if No in step 1452, step 1454 or step 1458, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500).

Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the special game operating condition determination process according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. First, in step 1502, the special game control means MP30 refers to the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the accessory continuous operation device operation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1502, in step 1503, the condition determination means MP31 refers to the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the condition device operation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1503, in step 1504, the special game control means MP30 has the specific game flag (main game probability change flag, main game time reduction flag, auxiliary game time reduction) in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b. Flag) is turned off. Next, in step 1508, the specific game control means MP50 clears the value of the time reduction counter MP52c and shifts to the next process (process of step 1600). Even if No in step 1502 or step 1503, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1600).

Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. First, in step 1602, the condition determination means MP31 refers to the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the condition device operation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1602, in step 1604, the special game control means MP30 refers to the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the accessory continuous operation device operation flag is off. .. In the case of Yes in step 1604, in step 1606, the special game control means MP30 turns on the accessory continuous operation device operation flag in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1608, the special game executing means MP33 sets an initial value (1 in this example) in the round number counter (not shown) in the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1610, the special game execution means MP33 sets the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the information (special game start display instruction command) to the effect that the special game is started to the sub-main control unit side (command transmission buffer MT10). In the control command transmission process in step 1990, it is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side), and the process proceeds to step 1614.

Next, in step 1614, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and whether or not the round continuation flag is off, in other words, immediately before the start of each round. Determine if it exists. In the case of Yes in step 1614, that is, immediately before the start of each round, first, in step 1616, the special game executing means MP33 sets the opening pattern (for example, continuing to open) in the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. Open pattern, open / close pattern) is set. Next, in step 1618, the special game execution means MP33 clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c to zero. Next, in step 1620, the special game execution means MP33 turns on the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1622, the special game execution means MP33 drives the first large winning opening electric accessory C11d (or the second large winning opening electric accessory C21d) to drive the first large winning opening C10 (or the second large winning opening C10). The winning opening C20) is opened, and a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) is set in the special game timer MP34t (particularly the opening time timer) to start. Next, in step 1623, the special game execution means MP33 turns on the flag during the valid period of the first (second) large winning opening, which is in the flag area of the ball entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b, and proceeds to step 1624. To do. On the other hand, if No in step 1614, that is, if the big winning opening is open, the process proceeds to step 1624 without performing the processes of steps 1616 to 1623.

Next, in step 1624, the special game execution means MP33 transmits a game state command (for example, the current number of rounds, the number of winning games, etc.) related to the current special game to the sub-main control unit SM side. It is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for this purpose (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process in step 1990). Next, in step 1625, the special game executing means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the ball entry waiting flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1625, in step 1626, the special game executing means MP33 refers to the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and in the round, a predetermined number is set in the first winning opening C10 (or the second major winning opening C20). It is determined whether or not there is a winning ball (for example, 10 balls). If Yes in step 1626, the process proceeds to step 1628. On the other hand, if No in step 1626, in step 1627, the special game executing means MP33 refers to the special game timer MP34t (particularly the opening time timer), and the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) related to the opening of the large winning opening is set. Determine if it has passed. In the case of Yes in step 1627, the process proceeds to step 1628. If No in step 1627, the system returns to the caller of this subroutine.

Next, in step 1628, the special game execution means MP33 of the first large winning opening electric accessory C11d of the first large winning opening C10 (or the second large winning opening electric accessory C21d of the second large winning opening C20). The drive is stopped and the first prize opening C10 (or the second prize opening C20) is closed (the process related to the closure is executed in the process, but the process of actually transmitting the control command to the device). Will be executed in the control command transmission process in step 1990). Next, in step 1629, the special game execution means MP33 starts by setting the large winning opening entry waiting time (3 seconds in this example) in the large winning opening entry waiting timer MP34t3. Next, in step 1630, the special game executing means MP33 turns on the ball entry waiting flag in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to step 1631. In addition, even if No in step 1625, the process proceeds to step 1631.

Next, in step 1631, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the large winning opening ball entry standby timer, and determines whether or not the timer value is 0. In the case of Yes in step 1631, in step 1632, the special game executing means MP33 turns off the ball entry waiting flag in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1633, the special game executing means MP33 turns off the flag during the valid period of the first (second) large winning opening, which is in the flag area of the ball entry-related information temporary storage means MJ10b. Next, in step 1634, the special game execution means MP33 resets the release timer MP34t2. Next, in step 1635, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1636, the special game executing means MP33 adds 1 to the counter value of the round number counter (not shown) in the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1638, the special game executing means MP33 refers to the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and whether or not the final round is completed (for example, the round number counter in the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b). Whether or not the counter value (not shown) exceeds the maximum number of rounds) is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1638, in step 1640, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the accessory continuous operation device operation flag in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1642, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the condition device operation flag in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1644, the special game execution means MP33 sets the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the information indicating the end of the special game (special game end display instruction command) to the sub-main control unit SM side. (It is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process in step 1990). Then, in step 1700, the specific game control means MP50 executes the game state determination process after the end of the special game, which will be described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1900). Even if No in step 1602, step 1631 or step 1638, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1900).

Next, FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game, which relates to the subroutine of step 1700 in FIG. 25. First, in step 1702, in the specific game control means MP50, the stopped jackpot symbol is a probabilistic jackpot symbol (a main game symbol that is in a probability-variable game state after the end of the special game, and in this example, 5A, 5B, 7A, 7B. ) Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1702, in step 1704, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game probability change flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to step 1708. On the other hand, if No in step 1702, in step 1706, the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (100 in this example) to the counter value of the time saving number counter MP52c, and proceeds to step 1708. Next, in step 1708 and step 1710, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game time reduction flag and the auxiliary game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and next processing (step). 1900 processing).

Next, FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the ball entry number determination process according to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. First, in step 2102, the maintenance control means MO
The total number of balls entered G is calculated by executing the addition process of the counter value of the starting port entry number counter MJ12c and the counter value of the general entry number counter MJ13c. Next, in step 2104, the maintenance control means MO determines whether or not the total number of balls entered G calculated in step 2102 is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (100 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 2104, in step 2106, the maintenance control means MO calculates "starting port entry number counter value / general entry number counter value" as the entry ratio N. Next, in step 2108, the maintenance control means MO determines whether or not the ball entry ratio N calculated in step 2106 is within a predetermined range (1/4 ≦ N ≦ 4 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 2108, in step 2110, the maintenance control means MO displays a normal display (for example, "00") on the ball entry status display device J10, and proceeds to step 2114. On the other hand, if No in step 2108, in step 2112, the maintenance control means MO displays an abnormality display (for example, "01") on the ball entry status display device J10, and proceeds to step 2114. Next, in step 2114, the maintenance control means MO clears the starting port entry number counter MJ12c and the general entry number counter MJ13c to zero, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1900). On the other hand, even if No in step 2104, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1900). As described above, in the present embodiment, every time the total number of game balls entered in the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10, and the general winning opening P10 reaches 100 balls, the first main player The total number of game balls entered in the game start opening A10 and the second main game start opening B10 and the number of game balls entered in the general winning opening P10 are calculated, and the entry ratio N is calculated. The display executed by the ball entry state display device J10 is configured to differ depending on whether or not it is within the normal range (“1/4 ≦ N ≦ 4” in this example).

Next, FIG. 28 is a flowchart of fraud detection information management processing according to the subroutine of step 1900 in FIG. First, in step 1902, the fraud detection information management means ME refers to the fraudulent radio wave sensor and determines whether or not the input from the fraudulent radio wave sensor is ON for a predetermined number of times in a row (for example, the process is a timer interrupt process). It is a process executed in the above, and the purpose is to eliminate the influence of noise by determining whether or not the interrupts are turned on continuously in a predetermined number of interrupts. The same applies when the term "consecutively specified number of times" is used). In the case of Yes in step 1902, in step 1904, the fraud detection information management means ME determines that a fraudulent radio wave has been detected, and turns on the fraudulent radio wave detection flag in the flag area of the fraud-related information temporary storage means MEb. The process proceeds to step 1912. On the other hand, if No in step 1902, in step 1906, the fraud detection information management means ME refers to the fraudulent radio wave sensor and determines whether or not the input from the fraudulent radio wave sensor is continuously turned off a predetermined number of times. In the case of Yes in step 1906, in step 1908, the fraud detection information management means ME determines that the detection of the fraudulent radio wave is completed, and turns off the fraudulent radio wave detection flag in the flag area of the fraud-related information temporary storage means MEb. Then, the process proceeds to step 1912. Even if No in step 1906, the process proceeds to step 1912.

Next, in step 1912, the fraud detection information management means ME refers to the fraudulent magnetic sensor and determines whether or not the input from the fraudulent magnetic sensor is ON continuously a predetermined number of times. In the case of Yes in step 1912, in step 1914, the fraud detection information management means ME determines that the fraudulent magnetism has been detected, and turns on the fraudulent magnetism detection flag in the flag area of the fraud-related information temporary storage means MEb. The process proceeds to step 1922. On the other hand, if No in step 1912, in step 1916, the fraud detection information management means ME refers to the fraudulent magnetic sensor and determines whether or not the input from the fraudulent magnetic sensor is OFF for a predetermined number of times in a row. In the case of Yes in step 1916, in step 1918, the fraud detection information management means ME determines that the detection of the fraudulent magnetism has been completed, and turns off the fraudulent magnetic detection flag in the flag area of the fraud-related information temporary storage means MEb. Then, the process proceeds to step 1922. Even if No in step 1916, the process proceeds to step 1922.

Next, in step 1922, the fraud detection information management means ME refers to the door opening sensor and determines whether or not the input from the door opening sensor is ON for a predetermined number of times in a row. In the case of Yes in step 1922, in step 1924, the fraud detection information management means ME determines that the door unit D18 has been opened, and turns on the door opening flag in the flag area of the fraud-related information temporary storage means MEb. , Step 1932. On the other hand, if No in step 1922, in step 1926, the fraud detection information management means ME refers to the door opening sensor and determines whether or not the input from the door opening sensor is continuously turned off a predetermined number of times. In the case of Yes in step 1926, in step 1928, the fraud detection information management means ME determines that the door unit D18 has been opened, and turns off the door opening flag in the flag area of the fraud-related information temporary storage means MEb. , Step 1932. Even if No in step 1926, the process proceeds to step 1932.

Next, in step 1932, the fraud detection information management means ME refers to the frame opening sensor and determines whether or not the input from the frame opening sensor is ON for a predetermined number of times in a row. In the case of Yes in step 1932, in step 1934, the fraud detection information management means ME determines that the gaming machine frame D has been released, and turns on the frame opening flag in the flag area of the fraud-related information temporary storage means MEb. Then, the process proceeds to step 1934. On the other hand, if No in step 1932, in step 1936, the fraud detection information management means ME refers to the frame opening sensor and determines whether or not the input from the frame opening sensor is OFF for a predetermined number of times in a row. In the case of Yes in step 1936, in step 1938, the fraud detection information management means ME determines that the gaming machine frame D has been released, and turns off the frame opening flag in the flag area of the fraud-related information temporary storage means MEb. Then, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1950). Even if No in step 1936, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1950).

Next, FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the error management process according to the subroutine of step 1950 in FIG. First, in step 1952, the error management means determines whether or not the error occurrence condition is satisfied (see FIGS. 73 and 74 for possible errors and control when an error occurs). In the case of Yes in step 1952, in step 1954, the error management means transmits a command (command to the sub-control board S side) relating to the fact that an error has occurred and the error type information (by the control command transmission process in step 1990). It is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side). Next, in step 1956, the error management means determines whether or not the error release condition is satisfied (see also FIGS. 73 and 74 for the error release condition and the control at the time of error release). In the case of Yes in step 1956, in step 1958, the error management means transmits a command (command to the sub-control board S side) related to the information that the error has been cleared (sub-main by the control command transmission process in step 1990). It is transmitted to the control unit SM side), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 3000). In addition, even if No in step 1952 or step 1956, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 3000).

Next, FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout command transmission control process according to the subroutine of step 3000 in FIG. First, in step 3100, the main control board M executes the payout control board transmission control process described later. Next, in step 3200, the main control board M executes the payout control board reception control process described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 3500).

Next, FIG. 31 shows a flowchart of the payout control board transmission control process according to the subroutine of step 3100 of FIG. First, in step 3105, the payout information transmitting / receiving means MHsj refers to the input port of the second line (the line that transmits the ON / OFF signal relating to whether or not the prize ball is being paid out), and whether or not the payout signal is OFF. That is, it is determined whether or not the payout is currently executed. In the case of Yes in step 3105, in step 3110, the payout information transmission / reception means MHsj refers to the unpaid prize ball information temporary storage means MHb, and the unpaid prize ball (still the prize ball payout command is sent to the prize ball payout control board KH side). It is determined whether or not there is a prize ball that has not been transmitted. In the case of Yes in step 3110, in step 3115, the payout information transmission / reception means MHsj refers to the flag area of the fraudulent related information temporary storage means MEb, and is an error in which it is inappropriate to pay out the prize ball. For example, it is determined whether or not an error related to a failure of the payout motor, a full tank of the upper plate, an error of running out of balls, etc. has occurred. In the case of Yes in step 3115, in step 3120, the payout information transmitting / receiving means MHsj corresponds to the unpaid prize ball information in the order in which the payout process is executed, which is temporarily stored in the unpaid prize ball information temporary storage means MHb. The prize ball payout commands (see FIG. 32) corresponding to the number of prize ball payouts are set in the payout command temporary storage means MHsjb. Then, in step 3125, the payout information transmitting / receiving means MHsj deletes the unpaid prize ball information corresponding to the prize ball payout command set this time from the unpaid prize ball information temporary storage means MHb, and shifts the subsequent information. To execute. Next, in step 3130, the payout information transmission / reception means MHsj transmits the prize ball payout command set in the payout command temporary storage means MHsjb to the prize ball payout control board KH side, and the next process (the pair payout control board in step 3200). Shift to reception control processing). In addition, even when No in step 3105, step 3110 and step 3115, the process proceeds to the next process (counter-payment control board reception control process in step 3200).

<< Contents of commands and information sent and received between the main control board / payout control board >>
Here, the contents of commands and information transmitted and received between the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH will be described with reference to FIG. 32. Here, the command from the main control board M to the prize ball payout control board KH according to the present embodiment includes specific information indicating that the command is a prize ball payout command and information on the number of prize balls. Specifically, bits 7 to 4 are fixed at 1001 (identification information that the command is a prize ball payout command). Next, bits 3 to 0 relate to the number of prize balls, for example, 0 (0000B) means 0 prize balls, and 15 (1111A) means 15 prize balls. ..

Next, the payout-related information transmitted from the prize ball payout control board KH to the main control board M side will be described. Here, as an example, the payout-related information (prize ball payout-related information or payout abnormality-related information) includes a fixed value (start bit), payout motor operation error information, excessive payout error information, ball path error information, and payout motor error information. , Prize ball device error information, saucer full tank error, and prize ball payout completion information. Here, the details of each error content will be described later, but if the bit corresponding to each error is "0", it means that the error has not occurred, and if it is "1", the error corresponds to the error. Means that is occurring. Note that bit 0 is related to the completion of the prize ball payout, "0" means that the prize ball payout is completed, and "1" means that the prize ball payout is not completed.

Next, FIG. 33 shows a flowchart of the payout control board reception control process according to the subroutine of step 3200 of FIG. First, in step 3205, the payout information transmission / reception means MHsj refers to the payout command temporary storage means MHsjb and determines whether or not the payout-related information has been received. Here, in the case of Yes in step 3205, in step 3210, the fraud detection information management means ME has error information (ball out error, upper plate full tank error, other payout related error) in the received payout related information. Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 3210, in step 3215, the fraud detection information management means ME accesses the flag area of the fraud-related information temporary storage means MEb and turns on the error flag related to the corresponding error to pay out the prize ball. Error information on the control board KH side is also managed (centralized management) on the main control board M side. On the other hand, if No in step 3210, in step 3220, the fraud detection information management means ME accesses the flag area of the fraud-related information temporary storage means MEb and sets an error flag related to the error on the prize ball payout control board KH side. Turn off. Then, in step 3225, the payout information transmission / reception means MHsj determines whether or not the prize ball payout completion information exists in the received payout-related information. In the case of Yes in step 3225, in step 3230, the payout information transmission / reception means MHsj clears the prize ball payout command (prize ball payout command related to the completion of this payout) set in the payout command temporary storage means MHsjb, and then (Processing in step 3500). Even if No in step 3205 and step 3225, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 3500).

Next, FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the external signal output process according to the subroutine of step 3500 in FIG. First, in step 3502, the external signal output control means MG refers to the game state temporary storage means MB and confirms the state of the game machine. Next, in step 3504, the external signal output control means MG refers to the external terminal transmission content determination table 1 and sets the hall computer HC via the external relay terminal plate G based on the confirmed state of the gaming machine. A signal indicating the state of the gaming machine is output, and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1990).

(External relay terminal board)
Here, the signal output via the external relay terminal plate G according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the lower part of the figure (image diagram of the signal output). The external relay terminal board G has a plurality of external connection terminals as output terminals to which various cable connectors are connected {for example, information on prize ball payout, information on winning or symbol stop, current gaming state (normal gaming state, Game state information output terminal for outputting information related to specific game state, special game state, etc., error information for outputting various error information detected by the open detection sensor when the door is open, etc. Output terminals, etc.} are provided. Then, as will be described later, the plurality of output terminals are connected to the hall computer HC by a cable harness so that information can be output from the plurality of output terminals to the hall computer HC. Here, in the present embodiment, one output terminal is assigned as an output terminal for payout-related information which is information output from the prize ball payout control board KH and is a plurality of types of information. The output terminals other than the one output terminal are output terminals for signals output from the main control board M. For example, there are a plurality of jackpot output terminals that output a signal during a jackpot at the time of a jackpot (there are a plurality of terminals depending on the type of jackpot). ), The door open output terminal that outputs a signal while the glass door D18 is open, the start port winning output terminal that outputs a signal when the start port is won, and the prize ball tank KT are short of balls. Game-related information that is important information for the game hall operator, such as an output terminal when the ball is out, which outputs a signal while the door is running, and an output terminal for the number of times the special symbol is confirmed, which outputs a signal when the special symbol is confirmed and stopped. It is an output terminal. That is, by setting the output terminal of the payout-related information as one output terminal, it is possible to prevent the output terminal of these important game-related information from being exhausted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are configured to transmit game-related information and payout-related information to the external relay terminal board G in the form of one-way serial transmission. There is. That is, no transmission line is provided from the external relay terminal board G to the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH (the same applies to information transmission from the external relay terminal board G to the hall computer HC).

Here, to explain the outline of the information transmission method of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, first, between the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH and the external relay terminal board G, and the external relay terminal board. The G and the hall computer HC are connected by a cable harness. On the other hand, as shown in this example, since the external relay terminal board G is composed of a communication relay (so-called relay), the main control board M, the prize ball payout control board KH, and the hall computer HC are always conductive. I'm not. That is, the electrical signal (a binary logic signal whose voltage is Hi level / Low level) input from the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH to the input terminal of the external relay terminal board G is the relay. After being once replaced with a physical signal (a binary logic signal whose switch state is on / off) by the unit, it is output from the output terminal of the external relay terminal board G to the hall computer HC. More specifically, the external relay terminal plate G has a plurality of relay coils G1 and contact portions G2 corresponding to the respective input / output terminals. Then, when the relay coil G1 is excited based on the pulse signal input to the input terminal, a magnetic force is generated, and the contact portion G2 is closed by the generated magnetic force, so that the output terminal and the hall computer HC are electrically connected. Further, when the relay coil G1 is degaussed, the contact portion G2 returns to the open state, so that the output terminal and the hall computer HC do not conduct with each other. Therefore, on the hall computer HC side, by detecting the conduction period, it is possible to obtain a pulse signal substantially the same as the pulse signal input to the input terminal of the external relay terminal plate G. With such a configuration, one-way communication from the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH to the hall computer HC can be physically secured, and the main control board M and the main control board M from the hall computer HC side can be secured. This is to prevent the goto act (so-called remote control goto) of illegally operating the prize ball payout control board KH. In this example, a mechanism using a relay coil is configured to enable one-way communication to the hall computer HC while preventing a goto action, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a pair of light emitting units and a pair of light emitting units are used. A photosensor having a light receiving unit also enables one-way communication (for example, the light from the light emitting unit connected to the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH is received by the hall computer HC. It should be added that the signal can be received by reading by the unit.

However, since the configuration is such that the physical signal (switch state is on / off) is temporarily replaced, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are connected to the hall computer HC, so that the external relay terminal board G It is difficult to transmit complicated information using the input / output terminals, and one type of information is transmitted using the one input / output terminal (for example, if it is an output terminal for a special symbol fixed number of times). It is customary to configure so that only the information that "one change of the special symbol has been completed" can be transmitted).

Next, the processing on the prize ball payout control board KH side will be described in detail with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 35 to 46.

First, FIG. 35 is a flowchart of the main routine 4000 executed on the prize ball payout control board KH side. First, in step 4100, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes an error control process at the time of abnormality detection, which will be described later. Next, in step 4200, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes a prize ball payout-related information transmission / reception process, which will be described later, with the main control board M. Next, in step 4300, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes the prize ball payout control process (at the time of starting the prize ball payout / starting the motor drive), which will be described later. Next, in step 4400, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes the prize ball payout control process (at the end of motor drive / at the end of prize ball payout), which will be described later. Next, in step 4500, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes the prize ball payout control process (when the motor is driven), which will be described later. Then, in step 4600, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes the motor error processing described later, and proceeds to step 4100.

Here, referring to the block diagram on the right side of the figure, the prize ball payout control board KH of the game machine in the present embodiment controls the transmission and reception of commands and information with the main control board M side, the card unit R side, and the like. Transmission / reception control means 3100 that controls the transmission / reception control means 3100, error control means 3200 that controls errors related to payout on the prize ball payout control board KH side, and a predetermined number of game balls that receive prize ball payout commands and ball lending commands. It has a payout control means 3300 for executing the payout process of the above. Hereinafter, each means will be described in detail.

First, the transmission / reception control means 3100 transmits information to the reception control means 3110 that controls reception of information (for example, commands and signals) from the main control board M and the card unit R, and information to the main control board M and the card unit R. It has a transmission control means 3120 that controls control.

Here, the reception control means 3110 further includes a main reception control means 3111 that controls reception of information (for example, a command) from the main control board M. The main-side reception control means 3111 further includes a main-side reception information temporary storage means 3111a in which the information transmitted from the main control board M side is temporarily stored. Further, the transmission control means 3120 further includes a payout-related error information temporary storage means 3121 for temporarily storing error information related to the payout operation for transmission to the main control board M side.

Next, the error control means 3200 detected an error flag temporary storage means 3221 for temporarily storing the on / off state of the error flag such as payout on the prize ball payout control board KH side, and a payout motor operation abnormality. Error control means 3230 at the time of detecting a payout motor operation abnormality that controls the error control at the time, error control means 3240 at the time of detecting a payout abnormality that controls the error control when a payout abnormality is detected, and an error when a ball path abnormality is detected. Error control means 3250 at the time of ball path abnormality detection that controls control, error control means 3260 at the time of payout motor abnormality detection that controls error control when a payout motor abnormality is detected, and a fatal abnormality related to the prize ball payout operation are detected. An error control means 3270 for detecting a payout stop abnormality that controls the error control when the error is made, a ball bite error generation timer 3200t that manages the error notification period when a ball bite error occurs in the prize ball payout unit KE10, and It also has a non-passing error occurrence timer 3200t2 that manages the error notification period when a non-passing error of the payout count sensor KE10s occurs. Here, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 further has an illegal payout accumulation counter 3231 for accumulating and counting the number of times that the payout motor operation abnormality is detected. Further, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 further has an excess payout accumulation counter 3241 for accumulating and counting the number of payouts of the excess prize balls. Further, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 further includes a payout interval extension control means 3251 that executes a time extension process of the payout interval related to the prize ball payout. Further, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 further includes a retry operation control means 3261 that executes a retry operation (retry operation) for eliminating the abnormal operation of the payout motor KE10m.

Next, the payout control means 3300 has a payout process-related information temporary storage means 3310 for temporarily storing information necessary for the payout process. Here, the payout processing-related information temporary storage means 3310 temporarily stores the payout-related state (for example, whether or not the payout is in progress or whether or not a payout abnormality has occurred), and the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311. The payout counter 3312, in which the number of game balls to be paid out is set during the payout process, the step counter temporary storage means 3313 for temporarily storing the number of steps to be driven by the payout motor KE10m, and the payout motor KE10m are driven. When this is performed, the exciting stator position specifying counter value temporary storage means 3314 for temporarily storing the position information of the excited stator and the predetermined time (waiting for ball passage) after one continuous payout operation (unit payout operation). It further has a ball passage waiting counter 3315 for measuring the time (time / motor pause time), and a unit payout counter 3317 in which the number of game balls to be paid out by the unit payout operation is set. Here, in the present embodiment, the ball passage waiting timer 3315 is a decrement type timer, and is configured to stop when the timer value becomes 0, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the increment type timer is used. It can also be configured using a timer. Hereinafter, each subroutine will be described in detail.

Next, FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the error control process at the time of abnormality detection according to the subroutine of step 4100 of FIG. 35. First, in step 4110, the error control means 3200 executes an error control process when a payout motor operation abnormality is detected, which will be described later. Next, in step 4120, the error control means 3200 executes a payout abnormality detection error control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 4140, the error control means 3200 executes an error control process at the time of detecting a ball path abnormality, which will be described later. Next, in step 4170, the error control means 3200 executes an error control process when a payout motor abnormality is detected, which will be described later. Next, in step 4190, the error control means 3200 executes an error control process when a payout stop abnormality is detected, which will be described later, and shifts to the next process (prize ball payout related information transmission / reception process in step 4200).

Next, FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the error control process at the time of detecting a payout motor operation abnormality, which is related to the subroutine of step 4110 of FIG. First, the purpose of this process is to count the number of occurrences of the abnormality when a payout motor operation abnormality, which will be described later, is detected, and to indicate the occurrence of an error when the number of occurrences of the abnormality exceeds the threshold value. Is to turn on. First, in step 4111, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the payout motor operation abnormality detection flag is on. Here, as will be described later, the payout motor operation abnormality detection flag detects the passage of the game ball by the payout count sensor KE10s under the condition that the prize ball payout process is not executed on the prize ball payout control board KH side. This is a flag that turns on when this is done (delivery motor operation error). In the case of Yes in step 4111, in step 4112, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the payout motor operation abnormality detection flag. Next, in step 4113, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 adds 1 (increments) the counter value of the illegal payout cumulative counter 3231. Next, in step 4114, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 refers to the counter value of the illegal payout cumulative counter 3231, and determines whether or not the count value is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, 25). To do. In the case of Yes in step 4114, in step 4115, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 turns on the payout motor operation error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4116. Even if No in step 4111 or 4114, the process proceeds to step 4116.

Next, in step 4116, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the payout motor operation error flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4116, in step 4119, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 sets the payout motor operation error as the payout-related error information in the payout-related error information temporary storage means 3121, and performs the next process ( The process proceeds to step 4120 (error control process when a payout abnormality is detected). Even if No in step 4116, the process proceeds to the next process (error control process when a payout abnormality is detected in step 4120).

Next, FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the error control process at the time of payout abnormality detection according to the subroutine of step 4120 of FIG. First, the purpose of this process is to count the number of excessive game ball payouts caused by the abnormality when a payout abnormality described later is detected, and when the count number exceeds the threshold value. Turn on the flag that indicates that an error has occurred. First, in step 4121, the payout abnormality detection time error control means 3240 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the payout abnormality detection flag is on. Here, as will be described later, when the payout abnormality detection flag exceeds a predetermined number of prize ball payouts based on the command transmitted from the main control board M side and an excessive payout of game balls is detected (payout). It is a flag that is turned on when (abnormal). In the case of Yes in step 4121, in step 4122, the payout abnormality detection time error control means 3240 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the payout abnormality detection flag. Next, in step 4123, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 acquires the excess payout number temporarily stored in the payout processing-related information temporary storage means 3310, and transfers the excess payout number to the excess payout cumulative counter 3241. to add. Next, in step 4124, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 refers to the counter value of the excess payout cumulative counter 3241, and determines whether or not the count value is a predetermined number (for example, 25) or more. If Yes in step 4124, step 412
At 5, the payout abnormality detection time error control means 3240 turns on the excess payout error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4126. Even if No in step 4121 or 4124, the process proceeds to step 4126. The overpayment error (state in which the overpayment error flag is on) is configured to be resolved only by turning on the power again, but this example is only an example and is not limited to this. For example, the error may be resolved by pressing the error release switch, elapse of a predetermined time, or the like.

Next, in step 4126, the payout abnormality detection time error control means 3240 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the excess payout error flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4126, in step 4129, the payout error detection error control means 3240 sets the excessive payout error as the payout-related error information in the payout-related error information temporary storage means 3121, and performs the next process (step 4140). Move to error control processing when ball path abnormality is detected). Even if No in step 4126, the process proceeds to the next process (error control process when a ball path abnormality is detected in step 4140).

Next, FIG. 39 is a flowchart of the error control process at the time of ball path abnormality detection according to the subroutine of step 4140 of FIG. First, the purpose of this process is that when a ball path abnormality, which will be described later, is detected, (1) an abnormality occurs in which a game ball does not exist in the prize ball tank KT or the prize ball payout unit KE10 (ball out). Or, if an abnormality has occurred in which the number of game balls existing in the prize ball payout unit KE10 is small (ball shortage) has occurred, and if an abnormality corresponding to the ball out abnormality or the ball shortage abnormality is detected, , Turn on the flag that indicates the occurrence of an error. In addition, (2) when an abnormality corresponding to a ball shortage abnormality or a ball shortage abnormality is detected, the waiting time until the ball shortage abnormality or the ball shortage abnormality is resolved by extending the payout interval of the prize ball payout. Is to create. First, in step 4141, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and determines whether or not the ball path abnormality detection flag is on. Here, as will be described later, the ball path abnormality detection flag is at the end of execution of a predetermined number of payout operations (unit payout operations) scheduled on the prize ball payout control board KH side, and the motor drive operates normally. It is a flag to be turned on when a situation is detected in which the number of payouts is less than the predetermined number to be paid out under the situation where it is determined that the payout is being made. In the case of Yes in step 4141, in step 4142, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the ball path abnormality detection flag. Next, in step 4143, the error control means 3250 at the time of detecting a ball path abnormality determines whether or not the condition for generating the ball out abnormality or the ball shortage abnormality is satisfied. Here, the conditions for generating the ball shortage abnormality or the ball shortage abnormality are not particularly limited, but for example, a game ball detection sensor is provided at a predetermined position in the prize ball tank KT or the prize ball payout unit KE10, and the detection sensor is used. An example in which a ball out abnormality occurs when the presence of a game ball cannot be detected, or a ball flow path directly above the sprocket KE10p in the prize ball payout unit KE10 (in this example, two ball flow paths are used. An example may be given in which a detection sensor for a game ball is provided in each of the presence), and when the presence of the game ball cannot be detected by any of the detection sensors, the condition is that a ball shortage abnormality occurs. In the case of Yes in step 4143, in step 4144, the error control means 3250 at the time of detecting a ball path abnormality turns on the ball path error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221. Then, in step 4146, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 sets the ball path error as the payout-related error information in the payout-related error information temporary storage means 3121, and proceeds to step 4151. Even if No in step 4141 or 4143, the process proceeds to step 4151.

Next, in step 4151, the ball path abnormality detection time error control means 3250 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the ball path error flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4151, in step 4152, the error control means 3250 at the time of detecting a ball path abnormality determines whether or not the condition for resolving the ball shortage abnormality or the ball shortage abnormality is satisfied. Here, the condition for resolving the abnormal ball breakage or the shortage of the ball is not particularly limited, and an example in which the abnormality is resolved when the above-mentioned condition for generating the abnormal ball shortage or the shortage of the ball is unsatisfied. Can be mentioned. In the case of Yes in step 4152, in step 4153, the error control means 3250 at the time of detecting a ball path abnormality turns off the ball path error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221. Then, in step 4155, the payout interval extension control means 3251 continuously excites a predetermined number of payout operations at a speed of one in 3 ms × 8 steps = 24 ms during normal operation) and balls. The passage waiting time (for example, 500 ms) is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (error control process when a payout motor abnormality is detected in step 4170). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4152, in step 4156, the payout interval extension control means 3251 sets the excitation timing and the ball passing waiting time so that the payout speed of one ball is relatively low as compared with the normal operation. The change is made, and the process proceeds to the next process (error control process when a payout motor abnormality is detected in step 4170). Even if No in step 4151, the process proceeds to the next process (error control process when a payout motor abnormality is detected in step 4170). Here, the excitation timing to be changed is not particularly limited, but for example, after executing the payout operation for one ball at a speed of one in 3 ms × 8 steps = 24 ms, a waiting time (for example, 5 seconds) is waited for. An example may be given in which a time is provided and the excitation timing is changed so that the payout operation is executed again at a speed of 1 in 3 ms × 8 steps = 24 ms after the waiting time has elapsed. Further, the waiting time for passing the ball to be changed is not particularly limited (for example, changed from 500 ms to 30 seconds).

Next, FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the payout motor abnormality detection error control process according to the subroutine of step 4170 of FIG. 36. First, the purpose of this process is to turn on the flag indicating the occurrence of an error when a payout motor abnormality, which will be described later, is detected, and to retry the payout motor (stepping motor KE10m in the prize ball payout unit KE10). It is to execute the switching control process. First, in step 4171, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the payout motor abnormality detection flag is on. Here, as will be described later, the payout motor abnormality detection flag is a flag that is turned on when it is determined that the motor drive is not operating normally due to an external factor such as ball biting. In the case of Yes in step 4171, in step 4172, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 turns off the payout motor abnormality detection flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311. Next, in step 4173, the payout motor abnormality detection time error control means 3260 turns on the payout motor error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221. Next, in step 4175, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 sets the payout motor error as the payout-related error information in the payout-related error information temporary storage means 3121. Then, in step 4176, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 turns on the retry operation execution standby flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and proceeds to step 4177. Even if No in step 4171, the process proceeds to step 4177. Here, the retry operation execution standby flag is a flag for setting the retry operation in the standby state for a predetermined time after the occurrence of the motor error described later and providing a waiting time for resolving the motor error within the predetermined time.

Next, in step 4177, the payout motor abnormality detection time error control means 3260 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the payout motor error flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4177, in step 4178, the retry operation control means 3261 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the retry operation execution permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4178, in step 4179, the retry operation control means 3261 turns off the retry operation execution permission flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311. Next, in step 4180, the retry operation control means 3261 sets a predetermined number of steps during the retry operation as the step counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313. Here, the number of predetermined steps during the retry operation is not particularly limited, but an example may be mentioned in which the number is set to the same as the confirmation timing of the rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms during the retry operation, which will be described later. Next, in step 4181, the retry operation control means 3261 sets 0 as the excitation stator position identification counter value (j) in the excitation stator position identification counter value temporary storage means 3314. Next, in step 4182, the retry operation control means 3261 is switched between an excitation method for the retry operation related to the stepping motor operation (for example, a well-known 1-2 phase excitation method) and a one-step switching speed for the retry operation (for example, 6ms) is set. Next, in step 4183, the retry operation control means 3261 sets a predetermined value (for example, 500 ms) as the ball passage waiting time / motor pause time related to the stepping motor operation in the ball passage waiting timer 3315. Next, in step 4184, the retry operation control means 3261 turns on the retry operation execution flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311. Then, in step 4185, the retry operation control means 3261 turns on the motor driving flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and shifts to the next process (error control process when a payout stop abnormality is detected in step 4190). To do. Even if No in step 4177 or 4178, the process proceeds to the next process (error control process when a payout stop abnormality is detected in step 4190).

Next, FIG. 41 is a flowchart of an error control process when a payout stop abnormality is detected, which is related to the subroutine of step 4190 of FIG. First, the purpose of this process is to turn on the flag indicating the occurrence of an error when a fatal abnormality related to the continuation of the prize ball payout process is detected, and to turn on the flag indicating the occurrence of the error and to continue the prize ball payout process. It is impossible to continue the prize ball payout process until the abnormality is resolved. Here, the fatal abnormalities related to the continuation of the prize ball payout process are communication abnormalities between the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH, communication abnormalities between the card unit R and the prize ball payout control board KH, and payout. Examples include a sensor abnormality of the count sensor KE10s and an abnormality of the saucer (upper plate) being full. First, in step 4191-1, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting the payout stop abnormality refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and determines whether or not the payout motor error flag has been switched from off to on. In the case of Yes in step 4191-1, in step 4191-2, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality sets the ball biting error occurrence timer 3200t with an error duration (for example, 120 seconds) and starts the error control means. The process proceeds to step 4192-1. On the other hand, if No in step 4191-1, in step 4191-3, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality refers to the ball biting error occurrence timer 3200t and determines whether or not the timer value is 0. judge. In the case of Yes in step 4191-3, in step 4191-4, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality turns off the payout motor error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and goes to step 4192-1. Transition. On the other hand, even if No in step 4191-3, the process proceeds to step 4192-1.

Next, in step 4192-1, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the switch non-passing error detection flag has been switched from off to on. In the case of Yes in step 4192-1, in step 4192-2, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting an abnormality requiring payout stop sets the error duration (for example, 120 seconds) in the non-passing error occurrence timer 3200t2 and starts it. The process proceeds to step 4193-1. On the other hand, if No in step 4192-1, in step 4192-3, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality refers to the non-passing error occurrence timer 3200t2 and determines whether or not the timer value is 0. judge. In the case of Yes in step 4192-3, in step 4192-4, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality turns off the switch non-passage error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and steps 4193-1. Move to. On the other hand, even if No in step 4192-3, the process proceeds to step 4193-1.

Next, in step 4193-1, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting the payout stop abnormality determines whether or not the error release switch KH3a is pressed. In the case of Yes in step 4193-1, in step 4193-2 to step 4193-5, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality detects a flag related to an error including the pressing of the error release switch KH3a as an error release condition ( For example, the payout motor operation error flag, the game ball detection flag when the payout operation is not completed, the payout motor error flag, and the switch non-passage error detection flag) are turned off, and the process proceeds to step 4194-1. On the other hand, even if No in step 4193-1, the process proceeds to step 4194-1.

Next, in step 4194-1, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting the payout stop abnormality determines whether or not a communication abnormality between the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH is detected. In the case of Yes in step 4194-1, in step 4194-2, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality turns on the communication error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4195-1. .. On the other hand, if No in step 4194-1, in step 4194-3, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality turns off the communication error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4195-1. Transition.

Next, in step 4195-1, the error control means 3270 when a payout stop abnormality is detected has a sensor abnormality of the payout count sensor KE10s (for example, there is no input from the count sensor, or the input value is constant for a predetermined time or longer. It is determined whether or not (yes, etc.) is detected. In the case of Yes in step 4195-1, in step 4195-2, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality turns on the prize ball device error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4196-1. Transition. On the other hand, if No in step 4195-1, in step 4195-3, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality turns off the prize ball device error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and steps 4196- Move to 1.

Next, in step 4196-1, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality determines whether or not a saucer (upper plate) full tank abnormality has been detected. In the case of Yes in step 4196-1, in step 4196-2, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting the payout stop abnormality turns on the saucer full tank error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221. Next, in step 4196-3, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality transmits a saucer full tank command to the sub-control board S side, and proceeds to step 4197-1. On the other hand, if No in step 4196-1, in step 4196-4, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality turns off the saucer full tank error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221. Next, in step 4196-5, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality transmits a saucer full tank release command to the sub-control board S side, and proceeds to step 4197-1.

Next, in step 4197-1, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality determines whether or not a connection abnormality of the card unit R has been detected. In the case of Yes in step 4197-1, in step 4197-2, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality turns on the CR unit unconnected error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and steps 4198-1. Move to. On the other hand, if No in step 4197-1, in step 4197-3, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality turns off the CR unit unconnected error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and steps 4198. Move to -1.

Next, in step 4198-1, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and a part of the error related to the payout operation stop (for example, an excessive payout error, a prize ball device). It is determined whether or not all the flags related to the error, the payout motor operation error, the game ball detection when the payout operation is not completed, the payout motor error, and the switch non-passing error) are turned off.

In the case of Yes in step 4198-1, in step 4198-2, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and the communication error flag, the prize ball device error flag, and the saucer are full. It is determined whether or not all the error flags of the error flag and the CR unit unconnected error flag are off. In the case of Yes in step 4198-2, in step 4198-3, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting the payout stop abnormality executes the normal payout operation in the payout control means 3300 (that is, the payout operation in step 4198-4 described later). Is paused, the payout operation is restarted), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 4200). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4198-1 or step 4198-2, in step 4198-4, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting the payout stop abnormality forcibly suspends the payout operation in the payout control means 3300, and then the next step. (Processing in step 4200).

Next, FIG. 42 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout related information reception process (to the main control board) according to the subroutine of step 4200 of FIG. Here, the first half of the flow is the information reception process from the main control board M (and the set processing of the number of prize balls paid out accompanying this), and the second half of the flow is the information transmission process to the main control board M. Therefore, to explain from the information reception process from the main control board M in the first half (and the set process of the number of prize balls paid out accompanying this), first, in step 4205, the main side reception control means 3111 is a payout state flag temporary storage means. With reference to 3311, it is determined whether or not the prize ball payout flag is off. Here, the "prize ball payout flag" means that the prize ball payout process is being executed on the payout control side (when the payout motor of the payout device is in the driving operation, the ball passing waiting time, and the motor pause time). It is a flag that is turned on when (when inside). In the case of Yes in step 4205, in step 4210, the main side reception control means 3111 refers to the main side reception information temporary storage means 3111a, and determines whether or not the prize ball payout command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 4210, in step 4215, the payout control means 3300 accesses the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns on the prize ball payout start permission flag. Next, in step 4220, the payout control means 3300 derives the number of prize balls to be paid out this time based on the prize ball payout command information temporarily stored in the main side received information temporary storage means 3111a, and pays out the prize balls. The number information is set in the payout counter 3312, and the process proceeds to the next process (step 4225). This completes the process of setting the number of prize balls to be paid out when the normal prize ball payout process is executed. In addition, even if No in step 4205 and step 4210, the process proceeds to the next process (step 4225).

Next, the information transmission process to the main control board M will be described. First, in step 4225, the transmission control means 3120 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and whether or not the payout-related error transmission flag is on. To judge. Here, the "payout-related error transmission flag" means that when the above-mentioned payout-related error {payout motor operation error, excessive payout error, ball out error, ball shortage error, payout motor error, payout stop error} occurs. Is a flag that is turned on and turned off after the error notification is sent to the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 4225, in step 4230, the error control means 3200 turns off the payout-related error transmission flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221. Then, in step 4235, the transmission control means 3120 transmits the payout-related error information set in the payout-related error information temporary storage means 3121 to the main control board M side, and proceeds to the next process (step 4240). Even if No in step 4225, the process proceeds to the next process (step 4240).

Next, in step 4240, the transmission control means 3120 temporarily stores the payout state flag 3.
With reference to 311 it is determined whether or not the prize ball payout completion flag is on. Here, the "prize ball payout completion flag" is a flag that is turned on when it is determined by the payout control means 3300 that the prize ball payout is completed. In the case of Yes in step 4240, in step 4245, the transmission control means 3120 accesses the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the prize ball payout completion flag. Then, in step 4250, the transmission control means 3120 transmits information to the effect that the prize ball payout is completed to the main control board M side, and the next process {prize ball payout control process of step 4300 (prize ball payout start).・ At the start of motor drive)}. Even if No in step 4240, the process proceeds to the next process {prize ball payout control process in step 4300 (at the start of prize ball payout / motor drive)}. This completes the prize ball payout completion information transmission process.

Next, FIG. 43 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout control process (at the time of starting the prize ball payout / starting the motor drive) according to the subroutine of step 4300 of FIG. 35. Here, the process is a process before executing the motor drive process of the next step 4400, and the number of steps of the motor drive and the like are determined in response to receiving the prize ball payout command from the main control board M side. It is a process to set. First, in step 4305, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the prize ball payout start permission flag (see step 4215 in FIG. 42) is on. In the case of Yes in step 4305, in step 4310 and step 4315, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns on the prize ball payout flag, and turns off the prize ball payout start permission flag. To do.

Next, in step 4320, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not the number of prize balls paid out set in the payout counter 3312 is a predetermined number (for example, three) or more. In the case of Yes in step 4320, in step 4325, the payout control means 3300 temporarily stores the counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313 so that a predetermined number of pieces are paid out, and proceeds to step 4332. The counter value (n) temporarily stored here is the number of steps of the stepping motor. On the other hand, if No in step 4320, the payout control means 3300 temporarily stores the counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313 so that the number of prize balls to be paid out set in the payout counter 3312 is paid out, and the step Move to 4332.

Next, in step 4332, the payout control means 3300 sets the number of payouts scheduled in the unit payout operation (that is, the number of payouts scheduled in step 4325 or step 4330) in the unit payout counter 3317. Next, in step 4335, the payout control means 3300 sets 0 as the excitation stator position specifying counter value (j). Here, the exciting stator position specifying counter indicates the relative position of the rotor with respect to the stator, and "0" corresponds to the default position at the time of payout standby (stop). Next, in step 4337, the payout control means 3300 switches between an excitation method for normal operation (for example, a well-known 2-2-phase excitation method) related to stepping motor operation and a one-step switching speed for normal operation (for example, 3 ms). ) Is set. Next, in step 4338, the payout control means 3300 sets a predetermined value (for example, 500 ms) as the ball passing waiting time / motor pause time related to the stepping motor operation in the ball passing waiting timer 3315. Next, in step 4339, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the retry operation executing flag. Here, the retry operation executing flag is a flag that is turned on during execution of the retry operation related to the stepping motor operation as described above. Then, in step 4340, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns on the motor driving flag, and performs the next process {the prize ball payout control process of step 4400 (at the end of motor drive / prize). (At the end of ball payout)}.

On the other hand, if No in step 4305, in step 4345, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the motor driving flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4345, since the motor has already been driven, the process proceeds to the next process {prize ball payout control process in step 4400 (at the end of motor drive / at the end of prize ball payout)}.

On the other hand, if No in step 4345, in step 4350, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the prize ball payout continuation flag is off. Here, the prize ball payout continuation flag is a case where the prize ball payout operation should be continued after the stepping motor operation for a predetermined number of steps in the unit payout operation and when the ball passing waiting time / motor pause time elapses ( It is a flag that is turned on (detailed conditions will be described later). If Yes in step 4350, the process proceeds to the next process {prize ball payout control process in step 4400 (at the end of motor drive / at the end of prize ball payout)}.

On the other hand, if No in step 4350, in step 4352, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the prize ball payout continuation flag. Then, in step 4354, the payout control means 3300 refers to the unit payout counter 3317, and whether or not the counter value exceeds 0 (that is, whether or not all the planned payouts by the current unit payout operation have been paid out). Whether or not) is determined. In the case of Yes in step 4354, in step 4356, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns on the ball path abnormality detection flag, and proceeds to step 4320. On the other hand, if No in step 4354, the process proceeds to step 4320 without executing step 4356. That is, when the prize ball payout continuation flag is on, the process of setting the number of steps for driving the motor and the like is executed again without triggering the reception of the prize ball payout command from the main control board M side. If it is determined that not all of the planned number of pieces to be paid out by the unit payout operation this time has been paid out, an abnormal occurrence that causes a ball out error or a ball shortage error will be detected.

Next, FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout control process (at the end of motor drive / at the end of prize ball payout) according to the subroutine of step 4400 of FIG. 35. Here, the process is an end process when the drive termination of all the motors scheduled in the previous process (step 4300) is executed, or all the prize ball payouts scheduled are executed. .. Here, the motor drive end process is executed from step 4402 to step 4419, the game ball detection process is executed from step 4420 to step 4425, and the prize ball payout end process is executed from step 4430 to step 4462.

First, to explain from the motor drive termination process, first, in step 4402, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the prize ball payout flag is on. To do. In the case of Yes in step 4402, in step 4405, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the motor driving flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4405, in step 4410, the payout control means 3300 refers to the counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313, and whether or not the counter value is 0, that is, the step of FIG. 43. It is determined whether or not all the steps in the current unit payout operation set in 4325 or step 4330 have been executed. In the case of Yes in step 4410, in step 4415, the payout control means 3300 accesses the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the motor driving flag. Next, in step 4416, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and determines whether or not the retry operation executing flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4416, in step 4417, the payout control means 3300 is the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311.
The flag area of is accessed, the retry operation executing flag is turned off, and the process proceeds to step 4418. On the other hand, if No in step 4416, the process proceeds to step 4418. Next, in step 4418, the payout control means 3300 maintains the dormant state of the stepping motor (in this example, after lowering the excitation output, it is continuously excited to the current excitation stator position specifying counter value (j)). Next, in step 4419, the payout control means 3300 starts the ball passage waiting timer 3315 and shifts to step 4420. In addition, even if No in step 4405 or step 4410, the process proceeds to step 4420. This completes the motor drive termination process.

Next, to explain the game ball detection process, first, in step 4420, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not the game ball detection signal has been received from the payout count sensor KE10s. In the case of Yes in step 4420, in step 4422, the payout control means 3300 subtracts 1 from the counter value temporarily stored in the unit payout counter 3317. Next, in step 4425, the payout control means 3300 subtracts 1 from the counter value temporarily stored in the payout counter 3312, and proceeds to step 4430. In addition, even if No in step 4420, the process proceeds to step 4430. Here, in this example, the value of the payout counter 3312 is configured to be decremented by 1 each time an incoming ball is detected, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the incoming ball of a plurality of game balls is detected. If so, the value corresponding to the number of balls entered may be subtracted. This completes the game ball detection processing.

Next, to explain the prize ball payout end process, first, in step 4430, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout counter 3312 and determines whether or not the count value is 0 or less. In the case of Yes in step 4430, in step 4431, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the motor driving flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4431 (that is, when the sensor detects as many game balls as the number of game balls related to the payout even though the driving of the motor related to the payout is not completed), in step 4432. The payout control means 3300 turns on the game ball detection flag when the payout is not completed in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4435. On the other hand, even if No in step 4431, the process proceeds to step 4435.

Next, in steps 4435 and 4440, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 to turn off the prize ball payout flag and turn on the prize ball payout completion flag. Next, in step 4441, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout counter 3312 and determines whether or not the count value is less than 0. In the case of Yes in step 4441, in step 4442, the payout control means 3300 turns on the payout abnormality detection flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311. Next, in step 4443, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout counter 3312, and the number of overpayments is based on the count value (for example, if the counter value is “-3”, the number of overpayments is “3”). Is temporarily stored in the payout process-related information temporary storage means 3310, and the process proceeds to the next process {the prize ball payout control process (when the motor drive is executed) in step 4500}. Even if No in step 4441 (that is, when the count value of the payout counter 3312 is 0 and the predetermined number of payouts is normally paid out), the next process {prize ball payout control process in step 4500] (When driving the motor)}. In this example, excess payout is detected when the value of the payout counter 3312 becomes 0 or less, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, after the motor for payout is finished. When a predetermined time (for example, a detection waiting time sufficient for the game ball paid out by the drive to be detected by the payout count sensor KE10s) has elapsed, the overpayment is detected (the value of the payout counter 3312 is less than 0). It may be configured to be able to execute (determination of whether or not) (that is, overpayment is an unforeseen situation in which the number of game balls that exceeds the number of game balls to be paid out is paid out. This unforeseen situation, which means that it has occurred and is extremely unlikely to occur in terms of design, means that one of the payout mechanisms has a problem, or that fraudulent activity has occurred during the payout operation. It means that it is likely to have been done).

On the other hand, if No in step 4430, in step 4445, the payout control means 3300 refers to the timer value of the ball passage waiting timer 3315 and determines whether or not the timer value is 0. In the case of Yes in step 4445, in step 4446, the payout control means 3300 turns on the switch non-passage error detection flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221 (in this example, it is predetermined after the payout operation is completed). If the number of game balls related to the payout operation is not detected even after the waiting time for passing the ball has passed, it is immediately determined that a switch non-passing error has occurred. Without limitation, it may be configured to determine that a switch non-passage error has occurred when the event occurs multiple times).

Next, in step 4447, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the retry operation execution standby flag is off. Here, the retry operation execution standby flag is a flag that is turned on when a motor error occurs during motor drive as described above. In the case of Yes in step 4447, in step 4450, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns on the prize ball payout continuation flag, and performs the next process {the prize ball payout control process in step 4500 (step 4500). When the motor drive is executed)}. On the other hand, if No in step 4447, in step 4460 and 4462, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns off the retry operation execution standby flag, and sets the retry operation execution permission flag. Turn on and move to the next process {prize ball payout control process in step 4500 (when motor drive is executed)}. Even if No in step 4445, the process proceeds to the next process {prize ball payout control process in step 2400 (when the motor is driven)}.

Here, in the case of No in step 4402 (that is, when the prize ball payout process is not being executed), whether or not the payout control means 3300 has received the game ball detection signal from the payout count sensor KE10s in step 4470. To judge. In the case of Yes in step 4470, in step 4472, the payout control means 3300 turns on the payout motor operation abnormality detection flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and performs the next process {the prize ball payout control process of step 4500 (step 4500). When the motor drive is executed)}. Even if No in step 4470, the process proceeds to the next process {prize ball payout control process in step 4500 (when the motor is driven)}.

Next, FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout control process (when the motor is driven) according to the subroutine of step 4500 of FIG. 35. Here, the process is a process of actually executing the motor drive based on the number of steps set in the previous process (step 4400). First, in step 4505, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the motor driving flag is on. The motor driving flag is a flag that is turned on when a predetermined number of step counters is set in the step counter temporary storage means 3313 (see step 4340 in FIG. 43), and corresponds to the predetermined number of step counters. A flag that turns off when all excitation is performed. Here, in the case of Yes in step 4505, in step 4510, the payout control means 3300 subtracts 1 from the step counter value (n) of the step counter temporary storage means 3313. Next, in step 4520, the payout control means 3300 updates (increments) the excitation stator position identification counter value (j) in the excitation stator position identification counter value temporary storage means 3314. Next, in step 4525, the payout control means 3300 excites the stator corresponding to the excitation stator position identification counter value (j) in the excitation stator position identification counter value temporary storage means 3314 based on a predetermined excitation method and switching speed. ..

Next, in step 4530, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not the counter value (j) in the excitation stator position specifying counter value temporary storage means 3314 is the confirmation timing of the rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms. Here, the confirmation of the rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms is performed for the purpose of confirming whether or not an abnormal operation (step-out phenomenon due to ball biting or the like) related to the motor operation has occurred. In the case of Yes in step 4530, in step 4550, the payout control means 3300 refers to the presence / absence of the detection signal from the rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms. Then, in step 4555, the error control means 3200 determines whether or not the rotor is rotating correctly, that is, whether or not a motor error has occurred, based on the presence or absence of the detection signal in step 4550. In the case of Yes in step 4555, in step 4560, the error control means 3200 turns on the motor position abnormality flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and proceeds to the next process (motor error time process in step 4600). In addition, even if No in step 4530, the process proceeds to the next process (processing at the time of motor error in step 4600), and if No in step 4555, in step 4565, the error control means 3200 temporarily stores the error flag. The motor error flag in the means 3221 is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process at the time of the motor error in step 4600).

Next, FIG. 46 is a flowchart of motor error processing according to the subroutine of step 4600 of FIG. 35. First, the purpose of this process is to forcibly shift the motor drive to the hibernate state when a motor error is detected. First, in step 4605, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the motor position abnormality flag is on. Here, as shown in step 4560 of FIG. 45, after detecting whether or not the motor exists at a predetermined rotation position at a predetermined detection timing, if the motor does not exist at the predetermined rotation position, step-out or the like is performed. This motor position abnormality flag is turned on. In the case of Yes in step 4605, in step 4610, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the motor position abnormality flag. Next, in step 4615, the payout control means 3300 turns on the payout motor abnormality detection flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311. Then, in step 4620, the error control means 3200 clears the step counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313, and shifts to the next process (error control process at the time of abnormality detection in step 4100). This is because the number of steps set this time is no longer executed due to the occurrence of a motor error, and after the count value is cleared, the motor drive shifts to the hibernate state (step 4410 and step 44 in FIG. 44). See 4415). Even if No in step 4605, the process proceeds to the next process (error control process when an abnormality is detected in step 4100).

Next, the control process executed on the sub-main control unit SM side will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 52. First, FIG. 47 is a main flowchart of the sub-control board S side (particularly, the sub-main control unit SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. Here, the process of FIG. 3D is a process on the sub-main control unit SM side that is executed after a reset such as when the power is turned on to the gaming machine. That is, when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, in step 5002, the sub-main control unit SM receives the RAM clear information from the main control board M side based on the information received from the main control board M side. If so, initialize the RAM on the sub control board S side, and if various information commands are received from the main control board M side, set and restore the effect-related information at the time of power failure, etc.) .. After that, the process shifts to the loop processing in which the iterative processing routine (e) of the sub-main control unit SM is repeatedly executed.

Here, when (e) is executed, first, in step 5100, the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM performs the hold information management process described later, as shown in the process of FIG. To execute. Next, in step 5400, the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM executes the decorative symbol display content determination process described later. Next, in step 5500, the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM executes the decorative symbol display control process described later. Next, in step 5600, the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM executes the special game-related display control process described later. Next, in step 5700, the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM executes the error notification execution process described later. Next, in step 5020, the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM executes the display command transmission control process (transmits the command set by these series of subroutines to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and this End the iterative processing routine.

As described above, the sub-main control unit SM adopts a form in which the sub-main side routines (steps 5100 to 5700 and step 5020) are looped after the reset.

Further, the process of FIG. 3F is an interrupt process of the sub-main control unit SM, and the signal from the STB signal line on the main control board M described above is one terminal of the CPU of the sub-main control unit SM (in this example). , NMI terminal), this is the processing flow (f). That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the CPU of the sub-main control unit SM (when the signal state from the STB signal line is turned on), in step 5004, the sub-main control unit SM is from the main control board M side. Check the command input port (input port of the data signal line described above). Then, in step 5006, the sub-main control unit SM sends a command from the main control board M side to the RAM (for example, the main side information temporary storage means SM11b) on the sub-main control unit SM side based on the confirmation result. Is temporarily stored and returns to the processing that was being executed immediately before this interrupt processing.

Next, the process of FIG. 3 (g) is a flowchart of the process at the time of power failure when the power supply unit E, the main control board M, or the like receives the power failure signal. That is, when the power interruption signal is received, in step 5014, the sub-main control unit SM stores the game-related information stored in the RAM in the evacuation area. Next, in step 5016, the sub-main control unit SM starts supplying standby power to the evacuation region. Next, in step 5018, the sub-main control unit SM prohibits the execution of the interrupt process and shifts to the power interruption waiting loop. In addition, the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM is provided with an area in which the reserve power is automatically supplied even after the power is cut off (or a RAM in which the reserve power is automatically supplied is provided), and the game-related information is provided in the area. It may be configured to be stored in.

Next, FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the pending information management process according to the subroutine of step 5100 in FIG. 47. First, in step 5102, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and a new hold generation command (first main game symbol or second main game symbol) is issued from the main control board M side. It is determined whether or not the hold information related to) has been received. In the case of Yes in step 5102, in step 5104, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 has a drawing hold counter in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b (in this example, a maximum of four for the first main game). Add "1" to the maximum of 4 for the 2nd main game). Next, in step 5106, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 draws hold information (particularly, a random number value related to the main game symbol lottery) based on the hold generation command transmitted from the main control board M side. The information is temporarily stored in the reserved information temporary storage means SM22b, and the process proceeds to step 5116.

On the other hand, if No in step 5102, in step 5108, did the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 refer to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and receive the symbol variation display start instruction command from the main control board M side? Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 5108, in step 5110, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 subtracts “1” from the drawing reservation counter in the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 5112, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 deletes the holding information related to the symbol change from the drawing holding information temporary storage means SM22b, and shifts the remaining holding information. Next, in step 5114, the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM accesses the flag area of the map display related information temporary storage means SM21b, turns on the symbol content determination permission flag, and proceeds to step 5116. .. Next, in step 5116, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 is mounted on the effect display device SG (particularly, the first hold display unit SG12 and the second hold display unit SG13) by making full use of the effect display means SS. Figure Hold information The hold indicator lamps of the same number as the number of the reservation hold counter value in the temporary storage means SM22b are lit and displayed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 5400). If No in step 5108, the process proceeds to step 5116.

Next, FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 5400 in FIG. 47. First, in step 5402, the map display content determination means SM21n refers to the flag area of the map display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the symbol content determination permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 5402, in step 5404, the map display content determination means SM21n turns off the symbol content determination permission flag in the flag area of the map display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 5406, the design display content determining means SM21n (and the advance notice effect display content determining means SM24n, the reach effect display content determining means SM25n) temporarily stores the symbol information (and the symbol information (and the symbol information temporarily stored in the main side information temporary storage means SM11b). With reference to the stop symbol / variation mode related to the main game symbol) and the lottery table SM21ta for determining the content of the change in the design, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol {for example, when the stop symbol related to the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol. Is a zorome such as "7, 7, 7", and in the case of a lost symbol, a disparity such as "1, 3, 5"} and a variation mode {for example, the variation mode related to the main game symbol is short-time. If it is fluctuating, it is non-reach, if it is fluctuating for a long time, normal reach, super reach, etc.} is determined. Related information Temporarily store in the temporary storage means SM25b).

Next, in step 5408, the map display content determination means SM21n turns on the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the map display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and performs the next process (process of step 5500). Transition. Even if No in step 5402, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 5500).

Next, FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 5500 in FIG. 47. First, in step 5502, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the symbol display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the symbol content determination flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 5502, in step 5504, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the symbol display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 5506, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns on the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the symbol display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 5508, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 starts the drawing fluctuation time management timer SM21t, and proceeds to step 5510. Even if No in step 5502, the process proceeds to step 5510.

Next, in step 5510, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the symbol display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the symbol changing flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 5510, in step 5511, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 confirms the timer value of the plot variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 5512, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the timing of the decorative symbol variation start based on the pattern variation time management timer SM21t and the variation mode temporarily stored in the map display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Determine if it has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 5512, in step 5514, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a variable display command for the decorative symbol (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process in step 5020). , Step 5530.

On the other hand, if No in step 5512, in step 5516, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 is decorated based on the pattern variation time management timer SM21t and the variation mode temporarily stored in the map display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether or not the stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) of the symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 5516, in step 5518, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a stop display command (temporary stop display command) for the decorative symbol (in the display command transmission control process in step 5020, the sub-sub control unit SS side. Is transmitted to), and the process proceeds to step 5530.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 5516, in step 5520, the advance notice effect display control means SM24 (and the reach effect display control means SM25) has the drawing variation time management timer SM21t and the advance notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b (and reach effect). Based on the variation mode temporarily stored in the related information temporary storage means SM25b), it is determined whether or not the display timing of the preview image or the reach image has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 5520, in step 5522, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and the reach effect display control means SM25) sets the image display command related to the notice image and the reach image (display command transmission control process in step 5020). Is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and the process proceeds to step 5530. Even if No in step 5520, the process proceeds to step 5530.

Next, in step 5530, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the main game symbol has been stopped and displayed (for example, referring to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, the main game from the main control board M side. It is determined whether or not the information that the symbol is stopped and displayed is received). In the case of Yes in step 5530, in step 5532, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a stop display command (confirmed display command) for the decorative symbol (transmits to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process in step 5020). Will be). Next, in step 5534, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 stops and resets (zero clears) the drawing fluctuation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 5536, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and shifts to the next process (process of step 5600). To do. Even if No in step 5510 or 5530, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 5600).

Next, FIG. 51 is a flowchart of the special game-related display control process according to the subroutine of step 5600 in FIG. 47. First, in step 5602, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect-related information temporary storage means SM23b, and determines whether or not the special game in-game flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 5602, in step 5604, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not a special game start display instruction command has been received from the main control board M side. To do. In the case of Yes in step 5604, in step 5606, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the jackpot is the first hit (the jackpot in the non-probability variable gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state). ) Is not determined. If Yes in step 5606, the process proceeds to step 5610. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 5606 (when it is the first hit), in step 5608, the background effect display control means SM23 resets (zero clears) the value of the consecutive villa count counter SM23c2, and proceeds to step 5610.

Next, in step 5610, the background effect display control means SM23 adds 1 to (increments) the value of the consecutive villa count counter SM23c2. Next, in steps 5612 and 5614, the background effect display control means SM23 turns on the special game in-game flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and makes a big hit on the effect display device SG. The start display is performed (display is appropriately performed based on the type of jackpot), and the process proceeds to step 5616. Even if No in step 5602, the process proceeds to step 5616.

Next, in step 5616, the background effect display control means SM23 sequentially displays the number of rounds and the number of winnings on the effect display device SG based on the game information sequentially transmitted from the main control board M side (gamability). It may be executed as needed based on the type of jackpot and the like). Next, in step 5618, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the consecutive villa number counter SM23c2 and determines whether or not the counter value is a predetermined value (for example, 10) or more. In the case of Yes in step 5618, in step 5620, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and the jackpot during execution is the maximum round jackpot (for example, 16R jackpot, 7A).・ Judge whether or not it is a big hit related to the 7B symbol). In the case of Yes in step 5620, in step 5622, the background effect display control means SM23 determines the ending effect {predetermined conditions (for example, the number of consecutive villas during the specific game, the total number of balls obtained during the consecutive villas, and the identification of a plurality of types. Set the command related to the display of the effect during the special game or the specific game, which is displayed only when one or a plurality of combinations of the effects are satisfied, and the process proceeds to step 5626. On the other hand, if No in either step 5618 or step 5620, in step 5624, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command related to the jackpot progress display, and proceeds to step 5626.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the effect displayed during the big hit execution a special effect based on the number of consecutive villas of the big hit (the first hit is not counted), and the second main game start port. If a big hit occurs due to a hold caused by entering the ball during the longest opening of the electric accessory B11d, even if the big hit is the first hit, it is counted as the number of consecutive villas. It is possible to attract the player's interest at the time of the change related to the hold that occurs during the longest opening of the object B11d. It should be noted that this example is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a plurality of conditions exist as the conditions for generating the ending effect, at least one of the plurality of conditions (for example, a big hit in a specific effect). , Etc.) may be considered to be satisfied.

Next, in step 5626, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 5626, in step 5628, the background effect display control means SM23 displays the jackpot end on the effect display device SG (displays appropriately based on the type of jackpot). Next, in step 5630, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the special game in-game flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and shifts to the next process (process of step 5700). .. Even if No in step 5604 or step 5626, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 5700).

Next, FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the error notification execution process according to the subroutine of step 5700 in FIG. 47. First, in step 5702, the error notification control means SM30 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not an error occurrence command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 5702, in step 5704, the error notification control means SM30 determines the error notification mode and the error notification end condition based on the error type corresponding to the received error occurrence command, and executes the error notification.

Next, in step 5706, the error notification control means SM30 determines whether or not the error notification end condition determined in the above process is satisfied. In the case of Yes in step 5706, in step 5708, the error notification control means SM30 ends the error notification related to the error satisfying the error notification end condition, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 5020). Even if No in step 5702 or step 5706, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 5020).

With the above configuration, according to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the non-probability variable gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state (the main game probability variation flag is off and the main game time reduction flag is off), and , The winning ratio between the main game start opening (1st main game start opening A10 and the 2nd main game start opening B10) and the general winning opening when the special game is not being executed (condition device operation flag is off). When the direction of the game nail is changed illegally by calculating and displaying on the ball entry status display device in a different display mode depending on whether the ball entry ratio is normal or abnormal. Even if the direction of the game nail changes due to the collision of the game ball or the game ball, it can be determined by the abnormality display of the ball entry state detection device, and a fairer game machine can be secured.

(Second Embodiment)
In the present embodiment, it is possible to determine whether or not the orientation of the game nail (state of the game nail) is normal based on the ball entry ratio between the main game start opening and the general winning opening. The mode for determining whether or not the state of is normal is not limited to this. Therefore, a configuration for determining the state of the game nail different from the present embodiment is defined as the second embodiment, and the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

Next, FIG. 53 is a main flowchart showing a general flow of processing performed by the main game board M according to the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2250 (second) and step 2300 (second), that is, after executing the above-mentioned special game control process in step 1600, in step 2250 (second), the main The control board M executes a base determination process described later. Next, in step 2300 (second), the main control board M executes the maintenance mode execution process described later, and proceeds to step 1900.

Next, FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the discharge ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2500 of FIG. 9 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2509-1 (second) to step 2509-3 (second), that is, in step 2508, the total discharge ball confirmation means MJ11-C90 is a total discharge confirmation counter. 1 is added (incremented) to the counter value of MJ11c-90. Next, in step 2509-1 (second), in the total discharge ball confirmation means MJ11-C90, the current game state is a non-probability variable game state and a non-time shortening game state (the main game probability change flag is off and the main game time is shortened). Determine if the flag is off). In the case of Yes in step 2509-1 (second), in step 2509-2 (second), the total discharge ball confirmation means MJ11-C90 is not currently executing the special game (condition device operation flag is off). ) Whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2509-2 (second), in step 2509-3 (second), the total discharge ball confirmation means MJ11-C90 is the normal total discharge confirmation counter MJ11c-C91 {non-probability variable gaming state and When the non-time reduction game state (main game probability change flag is off and main game time reduction flag is off) and the special game is not being executed (condition device operation flag is off), the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s is set. 1 is added (incremented) to the counter value of the counter that measures the detected number of game balls}, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2600). Even if No in step 2509 (second) or step 2509-2 (second), the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2600). As described above, in the second embodiment, the non-probability variation game state and the non-time reduction game state (the main game probability change flag is off and the main game time reduction flag is off), and the special game is not being executed ( When the condition device operation flag is off), the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s is configured to add 1 to the normal discharge confirmation number counter value when it detects the entry of a game ball.

Next, FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the prize ball number determination process according to the subroutine of step 2700 of FIG. 9 in the second embodiment. The differences from the present embodiment are Step 2706-1 (2nd) to Step 2706-3 (2nd), Step 2716-1 (2nd) to Step 2716-3 (2nd), and Step 2736-. 1 (2nd) to 2736-3 (2nd), that is, in step 2704, the prize ball payout determination means MH relates to the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc and is related to the first main game start port. The number of prize balls paid out (3 balls in this example) is added. Next, in step 2706-1 (second), in the prize ball payout determination means MH, the current game state is a non-probability variable game state and a non-time reduction game state (the main game probability change flag is off and the main game time reduction flag is set. Off) is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2706-1 (second), in step 2706-2 (second), is the prize ball payout determination means MH currently not executing the special game (condition device operation flag is off)? Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2706-2 (second), in step 2706-3 (second), the prize ball payout determination means MH is the normal time prize ball counter MHc-2 (non-probability variable gaming state and non-time reduction). To measure the number of prize balls to be paid out when the game state (main game probability change flag is off and the main game time reduction flag is off) and the special game is not being executed (condition device operation flag is off). The number of prize balls paid out (3 balls in this example) related to the first main game start port is added to the counter value of (counter), and the process proceeds to step 2708. In addition, even if No in step 2706-1 (second) or step 2706-2 (second), the process proceeds to step 2708.

Further, in step 2714, the prize ball payout determining means MH adds the prize ball payout number (3) related to the second main game start port to the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc. Next, in step 2716-1 (second), in the prize ball payout determination means MH, the current game state is a non-probability variable game state and a non-time reduction game state (the main game probability change flag is off and the main game time reduction flag is set. Off) is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2716-1 (second), in step 2716-2 (second), is the prize ball payout determination means MH currently not executing the special game (condition device operation flag is off)? Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2716-2 (second), in step 2716-3 (second), the prize ball payout determination means MH sets the counter value of the normal prize ball counter MHc-2 to the second main game start port. The number of prize balls paid out (3 balls in this example) is added, and the process proceeds to step 2718. In addition, even if No in step 2716-1 (second) or step 2716-2 (second), the process proceeds to step 2718.

Further, after adding the number of prize balls to be paid out (10 balls in this example) to the counter value of the number of prize balls in step 2734, in step 2736-1 (second), the prize ball payout determination means MH , It is determined whether or not the current game state is a non-probability variable game state and a non-time reduction game state (the main game probability change flag is off and the main game time reduction flag is off). In the case of Yes in step 2736-1 (second), in step 2736-2 (second), is the prize ball payout determination means MH currently not executing the special game (condition device activation flag is off)? Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2736-2 (second), in step 2736-3 (second), the prize ball payout determination means MH sets the counter value of the normal prize ball counter MHc-2 to the prize related to the general winning opening. The number of balls paid out (10 balls in this example) is added, and the process proceeds to step 2738. In addition, even if No in step 2736-1 (second) or step 2736-2 (second), the process proceeds to step 2738.

Next, FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the base determination process according to the subroutine of step 2250 (second) of FIG. 53 in the second embodiment. First, in step 2252, the maintenance mode control means MO calculates “normal time prize ball counter value ÷ normal time total discharge confirmation number counter value × 100” as a base value. Here, the base value is an expected value of the number of prize balls to be paid out for 100 game balls launched in a situation where the special game has not been won, that is, the prize balls to be paid out for the number of balls to be launched It is a percentage of the number. In the present embodiment, the base value is calculated only in the non-probability variation game state and the non-time reduction game state (the main game probability change flag is off and the main game time reduction flag is off). Further, since all the launched game balls are configured to pass through the total emission confirmation sensor C90s, "all launched game balls = total emission confirmation number counter value", and "non-probability variable gaming state and All game balls fired when the non-time reduction game state (main game probability change flag is off and main game time reduction flag is off) and the special game is not being executed (condition device operation flag is off). = "Normal total number of confirmed discharge counter values". Next, in step 2254, the maintenance mode control means MO overwrites the base value calculated in step 2252 as the current base value, temporarily stores the base value, and shifts to the next process {step 2300 (second)}. As described above, in the present embodiment, the base value is calculated based on the counter value of the total number of confirmed discharges in the normal time and the counter value of the number of prize balls in the normal time, and is updated as needed. The method of calculating the base value is not limited to this, and may be configured to be calculated every time a predetermined period elapses (such a configuration example will be described later).

Next, FIG. 57 is a flowchart of the maintenance mode execution process according to the subroutine of step 2300 (second) of FIG. 53 in the second embodiment. First, in step 2302, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not the door unit D18 is open (the door opening flag is on). In the case of Yes in step 2302, in step 2304, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not the firing handle D44 has detected a predetermined operation (for example, an operation in which the sensor detects that the firing is being fired). In the case of Yes in step 2304, in step 2306, the maintenance mode control means MO displays the current base value temporarily stored in the process of step 2254 on the ball entry status display device J10, and the next process (step 1900). Process). On the other hand, even if No in step 2302 or step 2304, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1900). As described above, in the present embodiment, the base value is displayed on the ball entry state display device J10 by executing two operations of opening the door unit D18 and performing a predetermined operation of the firing handle D44. There is. Although the launch handle D44 is a member that can be operated by operating the game machine from the front, it is not directly connected to the main control board M, and the main control board M determines whether or not the operation of the launch handle D44 is executed. That has become difficult. Therefore, in order to operate the maintenance mode (display the information related to the ball entry) by operating the launch handle D44, the main control board M side receives a signal indicating that the launch handle D44 has been operated. It needs to be configured so that it can be done. The configuration for solving such a problem will be described later. It should be noted that there is no problem even if the display conditions of the other display related to the ball entry shown in this example are the same as the display conditions of the ball entry state display device J10 illustrated in the figure.

With the above configuration, according to the gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the non-probability variable gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state (the main game probability variation flag is off and the main game time reduction flag is off). In addition, a prize between the main game start port (first main game start port A10 and second main game start port B10) and the general winning opening when the special game is not being executed (condition device operation flag is off). By calculating the base value from the number of balls paid out and the total number of ejected balls (number of launched balls) and displaying the calculated base value on the ball entry status display device, more detailed game ball entry status can be obtained. It will be possible to confirm.

In the second embodiment, the player does not display the base value on the ball entry status display device J10, that is, the maintenance mode is not executed, and maintenance is performed by a simple operation. The mode may be configured to be executable, and for example, the maintenance mode may be executed by operating the firing handle and the RAM clear button on the main control board M side.

Further, in the second embodiment, it is a standby demo screen (a screen displayed on the effect display device when it is determined that the game has not been executed for a predetermined period, for example, when the firing handle has not been operated for 5 minutes. The standby demo screen is displayed), and the maintenance mode is displayed by operating the sub-input button and entering the correct password while the password display screen is being displayed. It may be configured.

Further, in the second embodiment, the winning number information (the number of game balls entered into various entrances) and the number of winning balls paid out may be displayed as the display contents to be displayed in the maintenance mode. As a specific example, the main game symbol display devices (first main game symbol display device A20, second main game symbol display device B20) are configured so that a plurality of (for example, 32) dot displays can be lit. Then, the winning number information (the number of game balls entered into various entrances) and the number of winning balls paid out may be displayed by displaying the plurality of dots. Further, by satisfying the predetermined condition (for example, when it is determined that the ball entry ratio is abnormal), a command is transmitted to the sub-control board S side, and the predetermined condition is set by lighting the frame decoration lamp D18-L. It may be configured to notify that the condition is satisfied, to notify that the predetermined condition is satisfied by voice from the speaker D24, and the like. Further, the main control board M side may be configured to have a maintenance mode executing flag as a flag indicating that the maintenance mode is being executed. Specifically, when the maintenance mode executing flag is off. On the main game symbol display device (first main game symbol display device A20, second main game symbol display device B20), the fluctuation or stop symbol of the main game symbol is displayed, while the maintenance mode execution flag is turned on. In the case of, the main game symbol display device (first main game symbol display device A20, second main game symbol display device B20) is used to enter the entry (winning opening) to be paid out. Information related to the ball (hereinafter referred to as information related to entering the ball) may be displayed.

(Example 1 of change from the second embodiment)
In the second embodiment, the base value is calculated on the main control board M side, and the calculated base value is displayed on the main control board M side. However, the process until the base value is displayed. The flow is not limited to this. Therefore, a configuration for displaying a base value different from that of the second embodiment is referred to as change example 1 from the second embodiment, and the changes from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the maintenance mode execution process according to the subroutine of step 2300 (second) of FIG. 53 in the first modification from the second embodiment. First, the change from the second embodiment is in step 2308 (second variation 1), that is, if the launch handle D44 detects a predetermined operation in step 2304, in step 2308 (second variation 1). The maintenance mode control means MO sets a maintenance mode start command (a command to the sub-control board S side and includes information on the current base value), and shifts to the next process (process in step 1900). .. In this way, the command for starting the maintenance mode is set from the main control board M to the sub control board S. The maintenance mode is a general term for a configuration that displays information related to the entry of a game ball into various entry ports, and is displayed on the above-mentioned entry state display device J10 or on the effect display device SG described later. The display is also included in maintenance mode.

Next, FIG. 59 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit SM side according to the first modification from the second embodiment. First, the change from the present embodiment is step 5750 (second variation 1) in the figure (e), that is, in step 5750 (second variation 1), the maintenance mode display control means SM32 will be described later. The maintenance mode display process is executed, and the process proceeds to the hold information management process of step 5100.

Next, FIG. 60 is a flowchart of the maintenance mode display process according to the subroutine of step 5750 (second variation 1) of FIG. 59 in the modification 1 from the second embodiment.
First, in step 5752, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 determines whether or not the maintenance mode start command {command set in step 2308 (second variation 1)} from the main control board M side has been received. .. In the case of Yes in step 5752, in step 5754, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 displays the current base value on the effect display device SG, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 5100). On the other hand, even if No in step 5752, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 5100).

With the above configuration, according to the gaming machine according to the change example 1 from the second embodiment, the non-probability variable gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state (the main game probability change flag is off and the main game time reduction flag is set). Main game start port (first main game start port A10 and second main game start port B10) and general in a state where the special game is not being executed (condition device operation flag is off). The base value is calculated on the main control board M side from the number of prize balls paid out and the total number of ejected balls (number of launched balls) with the winning opening, and the calculated base value is transmitted to the sub control board S side to send the sub control board S. By configuring the effect display device SG on the side to display the base value, it becomes easy to activate the maintenance mode based on the operation of the operation member (for example, the sub input button SB) on the front surface of the gaming machine.

(Example 2 of change from the second embodiment)
In the first modification from the second embodiment, the maintenance mode is started by operating the launch handle D44 and the door unit D18, but as described above, the operation of the launch handle D44 is performed on the main control board. It must be configured so that it can be detected on the M side. Therefore, a configuration suitable for starting the maintenance mode in the current electrical configuration of the gaming machine is defined as change example 2 from the second embodiment, and the following changes from change example 1 from the second embodiment. Will be described in detail only.

First, FIG. 61 is a flowchart of the main game start opening ball entry detection process according to the subroutine of step 2200 of FIG. 9 in the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are step 2212-4 (second variation 2) and step 2231-4 (second variation 2), that is, in step 2212-2, the current special game. When was not being executed (condition device operation flag was off), in step 2212-4 (second variation 2), the first main game start opening entry determination means MJ11-A was started. A command (a command to the sub-control board S side and related to the fact that the game ball has entered the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10, or the general winning opening P10) is set (step 1990) Is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of the above), and the process proceeds to step 2222.

If the special game is not currently being executed in step 2231-2 (the condition device operation flag is off), the ball enters the second main game start port in step 2231-4 (second variation 2). The determination means MJ11-B is a start port entry command (a command to the sub-control board S side, and a game ball enters the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10, or the general winning port P10. A command related to the above is set (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1990), and the process proceeds to step 2240.

Next, FIG. 62 is a flowchart of the general winning opening winning ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2400 of FIG. 9 in the second modification from the second embodiment. The change from the second embodiment is step 2411-4 (second variation 2), that is, in step 2411-2, when the special game is not currently being executed (condition device operation flag is off). , Step 2212-4 (second variation 2), the general winning opening ball entry determination means MJ11-P is a start opening ball entry command (a command to the sub control board S side, and the first main game start opening A10, A command relating to the fact that the game ball has entered the second main game start opening B10 or the general winning opening P10) is transmitted (step 19).
It is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of 90), and the process proceeds to the process of step 2420.

Next, FIG. 63 is a flowchart of the ejection ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. 9 in the second embodiment. The change from the second embodiment is step 2509-4 (second variation 2), that is, in step 2509-2 (second), the special game is not currently being executed (condition device activation flag is off). In the case of step 2509-4 (second variation 2), the total discharge ball confirmation means MJ11-C90 is a discharge ball command (a command to the sub-control board S side, and the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s is a game ball. (Command related to the fact that the above is detected) is transmitted (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1990), and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2600).

Next, FIG. 64 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit SM side in the second modification from the second embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is step 5800 (second variation 2) and step 5900 (second variation 2) in the figure (e), that is, in step 5800 (second variation 2). The sub-control board S executes the base determination process described later. Next, in step 5900 (second variation 2), the sub-control board S executes the maintenance mode display process described later, and shifts to the process of step 5100.

Next, FIG. 65 is a flowchart of the base determination process according to the subroutine of step 5800 (second variation 2) of FIG. 64 in the second modification from the second embodiment. First, in step 5802, the sub-control board S is set by the start port entry command from the main control board M side {step 2212-4 (second variation 2) or step 2231-4 (second variation 2). Determine if a command} has been received. In the case of Yes in step 5802, in step 5804, the sub control board S has a sub-side normal prize ball counter SN10c {non-probability variation game state and non-time reduction game state (main game probability change flag is off and main game time reduction flag is set). (Off) and the special game is not being executed (condition device operation flag is off), the prize of the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10, or the general winning port P10. It is a counter for managing the number of balls to be paid out on the sub control board S side, and the number of start opening prize balls (3 balls in this example) is set to the counter value of} stored in the RAM area of the sub control board S. Addition is performed, and the process proceeds to step 5806. On the other hand, even if No in step 5802, the process proceeds to step 5806. Next, in step 5806, the sub-control board S determines whether or not the general entry command {command set in step 2411-4 (second variation 2)} from the main control board M side has been received. .. In the case of Yes in step 5806, in step 5808, the sub-control board S adds the number of general winning opening prize balls (10 balls in this example) to the counter value of the sub-side normal prize ball number counter SN10c, and steps 5810. Move to the processing of. On the other hand, even if No in step 5806, the process proceeds to step 5810.

Next, in step 5810, the sub-control board S determines whether or not the discharge ball command {command set in step 2509-4 (second variation 2)} from the main control board M side has been received. In the case of Yes in step 5810, in step 5812, the sub control board S has a sub-side total discharge confirmation number counter SJ10c {non-probability variation game state and non-time reduction game state (main game probability change flag is off and main game time reduction flag is set). To manage the number of game balls detected by the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s on the sub-control board S side when the special game is not being executed (the condition device operation flag is off). The number of discharges (1) is added to the counter value of}, which is a counter of On the other hand, even if No in step 5810, the process proceeds to step 5814. Next, in step 5814, the sub-control board S calculates “sub-side normal prize ball counter value ÷ sub-side total number of confirmed discharge counter values × 100” as a base value. Next, in step 5816, the sub-control board S overwrites the calculated base value as the current base value, temporarily stores it, and proceeds to the next process {process of step 5900 (second variation 2)}. As described above, in the second modification from the second embodiment, the base value is calculated on the sub-control board S side.

Next, FIG. 66 is a flowchart of the maintenance mode display process according to the subroutine of step 5900 (second variation 2) in FIG. 64 in the second modification from the second embodiment. First, in step 5902, the sub-control board S determines whether or not the door unit D18 is open (the door opening flag is on). In the case of Yes in step 5902, in step 5904, the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-input button SB has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 5904, in step 5906, the sub-control board S displays the current base value temporarily stored on the effect display device SG, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 5100). Even if No in step 5902 or step 5904, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 5100). As described above, in the second modification from the second embodiment, two operations of opening the door unit D18 and operating the sub input button (for example, off → on → off for 0.5 seconds or less) are executed. As a result, the base value is displayed on the effect display device SG. The sub-input button SB is connected to the sub-control board S and is configured so that it can be operated by operating the gaming machine from the front. That is, the base value is displayed on the effect display device SG by opening the door unit D18 and operating the game machine from the front. It should be noted that there is no problem even if the display conditions of the display related to the other ball entry shown in this example are the same as the display conditions of the effect display device SG illustrated in the figure.

With the above configuration, according to the gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the non-probability variable gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state (the main game probability change flag is off and the main game time reduction flag is set). (Off) and the main game start port (first main game start port A10 and second main game start port B10) in a state where the special game is not being executed (state in which the condition device operation flag is off) The number of prize balls paid out and the total number of ejected balls (number of launched balls) with the general winning opening are counted by the main control board M, and the counted result is transmitted to the sub control board S side. The sub-control board S is configured to calculate a base value based on the information related to the count received from the main control board M side and display the base value calculated by the effect display device SG on the sub-control board S side. As a result, most of the processing related to the display related to the entry state of the game ball (in this example, the display of the base value) can be executed on the sub control board S side, and the data capacity used by the main control board M. Will be able to be reduced. Further, when starting the maintenance mode, the maintenance mode can be started by opening the door unit D18 and operating the sub input button SB connected to the sub control board S side, and the electrical configuration in this example. It becomes easy to start the maintenance mode at. When displaying the base value (or the above-mentioned information related to the ball entry) on the effect display device SG, it is desirable to display it at a position that does not overlap with other displays. Specifically, the display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area SG11, the hold display of the first main game side in the first hold display unit SG12, the hold display of the second main game side in the second hold display unit SG13, and the error. It is desirable to configure such display (error that the door opening flag is turned on, etc.), etc. so that the display of the base value does not overlap.

Further, in the second modification from the second embodiment, the calendar function using the RTC function (which is a real-time clock and the details will be described later) has an authentication key for each date (the authentication key is different for each date). The maintenance mode may be displayed when the correct input operation is performed on the sub input button.

Further, in the second modification from the second embodiment, as the input mode of the sub input button, a back command or a hidden command (although it exists as an operation mode of the sub input button, the operation mode is not notified to the player). The maintenance mode may be displayed by executing the operation mode).

Further, in the second modification from the second embodiment, the RTC function (which is a real-time clock and the details will be described later) is used to input a command (for example, execute a predetermined operation on the sub input button) only at a predetermined time. ) May be implemented and the maintenance mode may be displayed when the correct command is entered.

Further, in the second modification from the second embodiment, the prize information relating to which entry port the ball has entered and how many prize balls have been paid out is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S. The sub-control board S may be configured to be transmitted as a command to the side and aggregated based on the received ball entry information, and the ball entry information includes the first prize opening, the second prize opening, and the general prize. It may be a mouth, an auxiliary game start port, an out port, a game ball that has passed the total discharge confirmation sensor, or the like.

(Example 3 of change from the second embodiment)
In the second embodiment, the base value is calculated on the main control board M side, and the calculated base value is displayed on the main control board M side. However, the process until the base value is displayed. The flow is not limited to this. Therefore, the configuration for displaying the base value different from that of the second embodiment is referred to as change example 3 from the second embodiment, and the changes from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, an example of a memory map of the main control chip according to the third modification from the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 67. The main control chip is mounted on the main control board M. The memory map shows the address space from "0000H" to "FFFFH". Of these, the built-in ROM is allocated to the space from "0000H" to "2FFFH", the built-in RAM is allocated to the space from "F000H" to "F3FFH", and the space from "FE00H" to "FEBFH" is assigned. Is allocated a register area (built-in register area) built in each circuit in the main control chip. By causing the CPU to execute an instruction to access these addresses, it is possible to execute access to the corresponding hardware.

The built-in ROM mainly includes a first ROM area which is an area for controlling the progress of the game (sometimes referred to as a used area) and an area for controlling processing different from the normal progress of the game such as error-related (not yet). It has a second ROM area (sometimes referred to as a used area), and has a first control area allocated to the space from "0000H" to "11FAH" and from "1200H" to "1D9EH". The first data area allocated to the space is collectively referred to as the first ROM area, and the second control area allocated to the space from "2000H" to "22E4H" and the "22E5H" to "2346H" are used. The second data area allocated to the space up to "" is collectively referred to as the second ROM area. The first ROM area is configured to have a larger capacity than the second ROM area (in other words, the data capacity existing in the first ROM area and accessed by the CPU exists in the second ROM area and is CPU. It is configured to be larger than the amount of data accessed from).

Further, the first ROM area stores the first control area in which the program code (instruction code set for the CPU) is stored and the program data used by the program (read by the processing of the CPU based on this program code). It has a first data area and a data area. Although the memory map image in the first ROM area is illustrated in the figure, the number of bytes in each area and the presence / absence of an unused area are merely examples.

Further, the second ROM area stores a second control area in which a program code (instruction code set for the CPU) is stored and program data used by the program (read by the processing of the CPU based on this program code). The second control area is configured to have a smaller capacity than the first control area (in other words, it exists in the second control area and is accessed from the CPU). The program code capacity to be generated is smaller than the program code capacity existing in the first control area and accessed from the CPU), and the second data area is configured to have a smaller capacity than the first data area. (In other words, the program data capacity existing in the second data area and accessed by the CPU is smaller than the program data capacity existing in the first data area and accessed by the CPU). Further, the built-in ROM has a management area in which various settings used when operating the main control chip are stored. Although the memory map image in the second ROM area is illustrated in the figure, the number of bytes in each area and the presence / absence of an unused area are merely examples.

The first ROM area may include a first control area (sometimes referred to as a control area of the used area) and a first data area (sometimes referred to as a data area of the used area). The area from the start address of the first control area to the final address of the first data area may be referred to as a first ROM area. Further, if the second ROM area includes a second control area (sometimes referred to as a control area outside the used area) and a second data area (sometimes referred to as a data area outside the used area). Often, the area from the start address of the second control area to the final address of the second data area may be referred to as a second ROM area.

Next, the built-in RAM is based on a first RAM area, which is an area (sometimes referred to as a used area) for storing information mainly based on the progress of the game, and a process different from the normal progress of the game, such as error-related. It has a second RAM area which is an area for storing information (sometimes referred to as an area outside the used area), and a first work area allocated to the space from "F000H" to "F149H" and " The first stack area allocated to the space from "F1D8H" to "F1FFH" is collectively referred to as the first RAM area, and the second work area allocated to the space from "F210H" to "F21DH". , The second stack area allocated to the space from "F3F2H" to "F3FFH" is collectively referred to as a second RAM area. The space from "F1D8H" to "F1FFH" in the first RAM area is allocated to the first stack area used when the program related to the first ROM / RAM area needs to store data internally. A second stack area is allocated to the space from "F3F2H" to "F3FFH" in the second RAM area, which is used when the program related to the second ROM / RAM area needs to store data internally. (However, the number of bytes in each area is just an example). The first stack area may not be included in the first RAM area, and the second stack area may not be included in the second RAM area. In such a configuration, for example, from "F000H". The first RAM area is allocated to the space up to "F149H", and the second RAM area is allocated to the space from "F210H" to "F21DH". The capacity of the first RAM area is larger than that of the second RAM area.

The first RAM area may include a first work area (sometimes referred to as a work area of the used area), and the first address from the start address of the first work area to the final address of the first stack area is the first. It may be referred to as one RAM area. Further, the second RAM area may include a second work area (sometimes referred to as a work area outside the used area), from the start address of the second work area to the final address of the second stack area. It may be referred to as a second RAM area.

Although there is no problem in changing the address that is the unused area, it is preferable to provide an unused area between (the address between) the first data area and the second control area. That is, in the case of the memory map configuration as shown in FIG. 67, the program code existing in the first control area and accessed by the CPU and the program code existing in the second control area and accessed by the CPU are Since they are separated (in a non-contiguous arrangement of addresses) on the memory map and an unused area is sandwiched between them, the arrangement positions of both program codes can be visually observed on the program source code or the dump list. It can be clearly separated above (the same can be said when an unused area is sandwiched between them). Similarly, an unused area is also provided between the first control area and the second data area, and the first control area, which is a control area related to the progress of the game, and the data area related to the progress of the game. Since an unused area is sandwiched between the first data area and the first data area, the placement positions of both program codes can be visually and clearly separated on the program source code or the dump list. Further, since the start address of the first data area is "1200H", which is a good number, it is possible to facilitate the design. On the other hand, no unused area is provided between the second control area and the second data area. Since the second control area and the second data area are areas that are not related to the progress of the game and have a relatively small capacity, the placement positions of both program codes can be determined on the program source code or the dump list. An unused area is not provided between the second control area and the second data area because the priority is to reduce the used capacity rather than visually clearly separating the data.

Here, regarding the ROM mounted on the main control board M, in order to prevent writing of a program or the like modified by fraudulent activity, it is possible to configure the ROM so as not to provide an unused area (unfilled area). It is suitable (for example, all unused areas are filled with 0, used areas are packed in a young address, etc.). Further, in the first control area and the first data area, in order to prevent data that is not normally referred to from being referred to due to noise or fraudulent activity, unused data (for example, referred to in a gaming machine having different specifications) is used. It is preferable to configure the data so that it is not provided (data to be used, data used only for testing at the development stage, etc.). Further, the first control area, the first data area, the second control area, the second data area, the first work area, and the second work area are packed in a young address and used, and within the area (within the area). No unused area is provided in (address of) (for example, "0010H" to "0050H" in the first control area in the range of "0000H" to "11FAH" is not set as an unused area). It is preferable to do so. In the unused area in this example, all the bits are "0", and in the area other than the unused area, any bit is "1" (not "0"). ing).

Next, FIG. 68 is a main flowchart on the main control board M side in the third modification from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are steps 1030 (second variation 3) to step 1032 (second variation 3).

<Processing in the 1st ROM / RAM area>
First, the timer interrupt processing starts, and the processing of steps 2000 to 1600 is executed as the processing in the first ROM / RAM area. Then, in step 1030 (second variation 3), the main control board M uses the second ROM / RAM. Execute an area processing call.

<Processing in the 2nd ROM / RAM area>
Next, in step 2250 (second), the main control board M executes the above-mentioned base determination process. Next, in step 2300 (second), the main control board M executes the maintenance mode execution process described above. Next, in step 1032 (second variation 3), the main control board M returns to the caller of the first ROM / RAM area, and thereafter executes steps 1900 to 1990 as processing in the first ROM / RAM area. Become.

With the above configuration, according to the gaming machine according to the third modification from the second embodiment, the first ROM area and the second ROM area are provided, and the first RAM area and the second RAM area are provided. By configuring and configuring the process of calculating the base value and the process of displaying the base value to be executed in the process in the second ROM / RAM area, the first in the main control board M
The data capacity used in the ROM / RAM area can be reduced.

(Third Embodiment)
In the present embodiment and the second embodiment, the ball entry ratio N (starting port entry number counter value / general entry number counter value) or base value (the number of prize balls paid out at a predetermined entry port is used as the game ball). Any one of (a value obtained by dividing by the total number of launched balls and multiplied by 100) can be displayed as a display of information related to the ball entering, but the display method of the display related to the ball entering is not limited to this. Therefore, the configuration relating to the display method of the information relating to the ball entering different from the present embodiment and the second embodiment is defined as the third embodiment, and the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 69 is a main flowchart on the main control board M side in the third embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is in step 1024 (third) and step 1026 (third) in the process of the figure (c), and in step 2300 (third) in the process of the figure (b). Yes, that is, in the figure (c), in step 1024 (third), the main control board M erases the display of the ball entry state display device J10. Next, in step 1026 (third), the main control board M turns off the maintenance mode flag and shifts to step 1020. As described above, the maintenance mode (display on the ball entry status display device J10), which will be described later, is configured to be terminated when the power is turned off. Further, in FIG. 3B, after executing the special game control process in step 1600, the main control board M executes the maintenance mode execution process described later in step 2300 (third) to perform the process of step 1900. Transition.

Next, FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the maintenance mode execution process according to step 2300 (third) of FIG. 69 in the third embodiment. First, in step 2310, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not the maintenance mode flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2310, it is determined in step 2312 whether or not a predetermined operation of the RAM clear button (for example, long pressing for 10 seconds or more) has been performed. In this process, only the long press started from the power-on state is determined, and when the operation of Yes is executed in step 1002, that is, the length of the RAM clear button from the power-off state. When the push is started, it does not become Yes in this process. That is, if the power-on switch Ea is turned on while pressing the RAM clear button, Yes is set in step 1002, but even if the RAM clear button is continuously pressed from that state, Yes is not set in step 2312. On the other hand, if the power-on switch Ea is turned on without pressing the RAM clear button, Yes is not set in step 1002, and the RAM clear button is continuously pressed (hold down the RAM clear button) for the first time. , Step 2312 becomes Yes.

In the case of Yes in step 2312, in step 2314, the maintenance mode control means MO uses the prize ball counter MHc {each entry port (first main game start port A10, second main game start port) to be paid out. Based on the entry into B10, general entry opening P10, first major winning opening C10, second major winning opening C20), the cumulative number calculated after the power is turned on for the number of prize balls to be paid out. } Is displayed on the ball entry status display device J10. Next, in step 2316, the maintenance mode control means MO turns on the maintenance mode flag and shifts to the process of step 2318. On the other hand, even if No in step 2310, the process proceeds to step 2318. Next, in step 2318, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not the RAM clear button has been pressed (unlike the long press in this process, the RAM clear button is off → 0.5 seconds. When the following is turned on → off, it is determined that the button has been pressed once). In the case of Yes in step 2318, in step 2320, the maintenance mode control means MO refers to the display content table during the maintenance mode and enters the display content corresponding to the display number next to the currently displayed display number. The display is displayed on the display device, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1900). Even if No in step 2312 or step 2318, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1900).

The table on the upper right of the figure is an example of the display content table during maintenance mode. The display contents (counter values) corresponding to the display numbers 1 to 4 are set in the display contents table during the maintenance mode, and each time the RAM clear button is operated, "display number 1 → display number 2 → display number 3 ・. The display content on the ball entry status display device J10 is switched to the display content corresponding to "...". As a specific example of the display on the ball entry status display device J10, when the RAM clear button is pressed and held for 10 seconds or longer from the power-on state, the ball entry status display device J10 is displayed with the display number 1. Ball counter MHc {Each entry port for paying out prize balls (1st main game start port A10, 2nd main game start port B10, general entry port P10, 1st big prize opening C10, 2nd big prize When the counter value of the cumulative number calculated after the power is turned on for the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the entry into the mouth C20) is displayed, and then the RAM clear button is pressed. , The start port entry number counter MJ12c, which is the display content of the display number 2 on the ball entry status display device J10 (a game in which the ball enters the first main game start port A10 or the second main game start port B10 under a specific situation. When the counter value of the counter (counter for measuring the number of balls) is displayed and then the RAM clear button is pressed, the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90, which is the display content of the display number 3, is displayed on the ball entry status display device J10. When the counter value of (counter for measuring the number of game balls detected by the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s) is displayed and then the RAM clear button is pressed, the ball entry status display device J10 displays the display content of display number 4. The counter value of a certain general winning number counter MJ13c (counter for measuring the number of game balls entered into the general winning opening P10 under a specific situation) will be displayed. If the RAM clear button is pressed while the general number of balls counter value, which is the display content of display number 4, is displayed, the prize ball counter value, which is the display content of display number 1, is displayed. Will be done.

With the above configuration, according to the gaming machine according to the third embodiment, a maintenance mode in which information related to ball entry can be displayed by pressing and holding the RAM clear button while the power is on. By configuring to start the game and changing the display type in the maintenance mode each time the RAM clear button is pressed during the maintenance mode, the gaming machine can confirm information related to multiple types of ball entry. be able to.

Further, in the third embodiment, as a condition for ending the maintenance mode when the maintenance mode is being executed, the power is turned off and returned, and various entry ports (for example, out port C80, auxiliary game start port H10, etc.) are used. The ball may be entered into a ball entry port) that is not subject to the prize ball payout. The condition for ending the maintenance mode may be the entry of the game ball into the specific entry port that triggers the start of execution of the special game by entering the ball.

Further, in the third embodiment, when the power is turned on while pressing the RAM clear button, the input port of the RAM clear button is in the ON state, and in such a case, the RAM clear button is pressed for a predetermined time (for example). It is not determined whether or not the button has been pressed (10 seconds or more) (No yes in step 2312), and the maintenance mode is not started. However, when the input port of the RAM clear button changes from the off state to the on state after the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear button has been pressed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds or more). It is configured so that maintenance mode can be started. Whether or not the RAM clear button has been operated is determined by checking the input port of the RAM clear button multiple times at predetermined intervals, but when the power is turned on while pressing the RAM clear button (step). At the time of determination in 1002), the input port of the RAM clear button is confirmed at an interval shorter than the execution interval of the interrupt processing, and after the power is turned on (at the time of determination in step 2312), the interrupt processing is performed. The input port of the RAM clear button is confirmed at the execution interval.

(Example 1 of change from the third embodiment)
In the present embodiment to the third embodiment, the entry status of the game ball into various entrances is constantly counted from the power-on of the gaming machine, and the display based on the count status is used as the information related to the entry. Although it is configured to be displayed, the display method of the situation related to the ball entry is not limited to this. Therefore, the configuration relating to the display method of the information relating to the ball entering different from the present embodiment to the third embodiment is set as the change example 1 from the third embodiment, and the details of the changes from the third embodiment are described below. Describe.

Next, FIG. 71 is a main flowchart on the main control board M side in the first modification from the third embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2300 (third variation 1) in the process of FIG. 3B, that is, after executing the special game control process in step 1600 of FIG. In step 2300 (third variation 1), the main control board M executes the maintenance mode execution process described later, and shifts to the fraud detection information management process of step 1900.

Next, FIG. 72 is a flowchart of the ejection ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. 9 in the first modification from the third embodiment. The changes from the third embodiment are step 2509-4 (third variation 1) and step 2509-5 (third variation 1). That is, in step 2508, after adding (incrementing) 1 to the counter value of the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-90, in step 2509-4 (third variation 1), the total discharge ball confirmation means MJ11-C90 handles the handle. It is determined whether or not the operating flag (the flag that is turned on when the firing handle D44 is being operated) is on. In the case of Yes in step 2509-4 (3rd change 1), in step 2509-5 (3rd change 1), the total discharge ball confirmation means MJ11-C90 is a total discharge maintenance counter MJ11c-C92 (increment counter, which is an increment counter. It is a counter that measures the number of game balls detected by the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s during the period when the firing handle D44 is operated during the maintenance mode, and is stored in the RAM area of the main control board M). 1 is added, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2600). Even if No in step 2509-4 (third variation 1), the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2600). With this configuration, the total emission number maintenance counter value is added during the period when the player is operating the firing handle D44.

Next, FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the prize ball number determination process according to the subroutine of step 2700 of FIG. 9 in the first modification from the third embodiment. The changes from the third embodiment are step 2706-4 (third variation 1), step 2706-5 (third variation 1), step 2716-4 (third variation 1), and step 2716-5 (third variation 1). 1), step 2736-4 (3rd variation 1), and step 2736-5 (3rd variation 1). That is, in step 2704, after adding the number of prize balls paid out (3 balls in this example) related to the first main game start port to the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc, step 2706-4 (third variation 1). ), The prize ball payout determining means MH determines whether or not the flag during handle operation is on. In the case of Yes in step 2706-4 (3rd variation 1), in step 2706-5 (3rd variation 1), the prize ball payout determination means MH is the prize ball maintenance counter MHc-3 (increment counter, maintenance mode). It is a counter that measures the number of game balls that have entered the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10, or the general prize opening P10 during the period during which the launch handle D44 is operated, and is the main control. The number of prize balls paid out (3 in this example) related to the first main game start port is added to the counter value (stored in the RAM area of the board M), and the process proceeds to step 2708. In addition, even if No in step 2706-4 (third variation 1), the process proceeds to step 2708.

Further, in step 2714, after adding the number of prize balls paid out (3 balls in this example) related to the second main game start port to the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc, step 2716-4 (third variation 1). ), The prize ball payout determining means MH determines whether or not the flag during handle operation is on. In the case of Yes in step 2716-4 (third variation 1), in step 2716-5 (third variation 1), the prize ball payout determination means MH sets the counter value of the prize ball maintenance counter MHc-3 to the second main. The number of prize balls paid out (3 balls in this example) related to the game start port is added, and the process proceeds to step 2718.

Further, in step 2734, after adding the number of prize balls paid out (10 balls in this example) related to the general winning opening P10 to the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc, in step 2736-4 (third variation 1). , The prize ball payout determination means MH determines whether or not the flag during handle operation is on. In the case of Yes in step 2736-4 (3rd variation 1), in step 2736-5 (3rd variation 1), the prize ball payout determination means MH sets the counter value of the prize ball maintenance counter MHc-3 to the general winning opening. The number of prize balls paid out (10 balls in this example) is added, and the process proceeds to step 2738. As described above, in the first modification from the third embodiment, when the firing handle D44 is operated, the addition process to the prize ball maintenance counter MHc-3 is different from the addition process to the prize ball number counter MHc. Is configured to be able to perform. In addition, even if No in step 2736-4 (third variation 1), the process proceeds to step 2738.

Next, FIG. 74 is a flowchart of the maintenance mode execution process according to the subroutine of step 2300 (third variation 1) of FIG. 71 in the modification 1 from the third embodiment. First, in step 2322, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not the steering wheel operating flag is off. If Yes in step 2322, in step 2324, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not the maintenance mode flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2324, in step 2326, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not there is a predetermined operation (holding down for 10 seconds or more) of the RAM clear button (only long pressing started from the state where the power is on). If the operation that is Yes in step 1002 is executed, it will not be Yes in this process). In the case of Yes in step 2326, in step 2328, the maintenance mode control means MO turns on the maintenance mode flag and shifts to the process of step 2330. On the other hand, even if No in step 2324, the process proceeds to step 2330.

Next, in step 2330, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not the operation of the firing handle D44 has been started. In the case of Yes in step 2330, in step 2332, the maintenance mode control means MO turns on the handle operating flag and shifts to the process of step 2334. Further, even if No in step 2322, the process proceeds to step 2334. Next, in step 2334, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not the operation of the firing handle is completed. In the case of Yes in step 2334, in step 2336, the maintenance mode control means MO calculates “prize ball maintenance counter value ÷ total discharge maintenance counter value × 100” as a base value.

Next, in step 2338, the maintenance mode control means MO displays the calculated base value on the ball entry state display device J10. Next, in step 2340, the maintenance mode control means MO turns off the handle operating flag and shifts to the next process (process of step 1900). Even if No in step 2326, step 2330, or step 2334, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1900). As described above, in the change example 1 from the third embodiment, the operation of the firing handle D44 sets the base value during the period in which the firing handle D44 is operated after the maintenance mode is started by pressing and holding the RAM clear button. It is configured to be displayed on the ball entry status display device J10 at the end timing.

With the above configuration, according to the gaming machine according to the change example 1 from the third embodiment, the information related to the ball entry can be obtained by pressing and holding the RAM clear button while the power is on. The game is actually played by being configured to start a displayable maintenance mode and calculating and displaying the base value during the period in which the launch handle is being operated during the maintenance mode on the main control board M side. Even if you want to shoot a ball and check the base value for a predetermined period, you can check it just by operating the firing handle and playing a game.

Further, in the first modification from the third embodiment, if the game ball enters any of the entrances by the time when the predetermined time elapses after the operation of the launch handle is completed, the ball enters any of the entrances in the period. It may be configured to calculate the information related to the ball entry including the number of ball entry. In such a configuration, a sensor capable of detecting that the game ball is flowing down in the game area may be provided.

(Example 2 of change from the third embodiment)
In the first modification from the third embodiment, the base value of the period during which the firing handle is operated in the maintenance mode can be calculated and displayed, but the execution mode of the maintenance mode is not limited to this. Therefore, the configuration in which the maintenance mode is executed differently from the change example 1 from the third embodiment is referred to as the change example 2 from the third embodiment, and the following changes from the change example 1 from the third embodiment. Will be described in detail only.

First, FIG. 75 is a flowchart of the maintenance mode execution process according to the subroutine of step 2300 (third variation 1) of FIG. 71 in the second modification from the third embodiment. First, the changes from the first modification from the third embodiment are step 2341-1 (third variation 2), step 2341-2 (third variation 2), and step 2341-1 (third variation 2). ). That is, when it is determined in step 2326 that a predetermined operation (long press for 10 seconds or more) of the RAM clear button has been performed, in step 2341-1 (third variation 2), the maintenance mode control means MO is the current By transmitting the command related to the game state to the sub-control board S side, the sub-control board S receives the command related to the current game state and the maintenance mode lighting mode table (main control board M side and sub-control) described later. The frame decoration lamp D18-L (which may be the game effect lamp D26) is lit in a lighting mode corresponding to the current game state, with reference to the fact that the board S side has each of the lamps D18-L. The process proceeds to step 2328.

Next, in step 2328, the maintenance mode control means MO turns on the maintenance mode flag and shifts to step 2341-2 (third variation 2). Even if No in step 2324, the process proceeds to step 2341-2 (third variation 2). Next, in step 2341-2 (3rd variation 2), the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not the RAM clear button has been pressed (pressing in this process means that the RAM clear button is off → 0.5 seconds or less. When is turned on → off, it is determined that the button has been pressed once). In the case of Yes in step 2341-2 (third variation 2), in step 2341-1 (third second), the maintenance mode control means MO uses the maintenance mode lighting mode table (main control board M side and sub), which will be described later. The game state is changed to the game state corresponding to the display number next to the display number corresponding to the current game state, with reference to (the control board S side and the control board S side have each). Next, in step 2341-4 (third variation 2), the maintenance mode control means MO transmits a command related to the current gaming state to the sub-control board S side, so that the sub-control board S has received the present. With reference to the command related to the game state of the above and the lighting mode table during the maintenance mode described later (it is assumed that the main control board M side and the sub control board S side have each), the frame decoration lamp D18-L (The game effect lamp D26 may be used) is lit in a lighting mode corresponding to the current game state (game state after the change), and the process proceeds to step 2330. In addition, step 23
Even in the case of No in 41-2 (third variation 2), the process proceeds to step 2330.

Here, the right side of the figure is an example of a lighting mode table during the maintenance mode. The game state corresponding to display numbers 1 to 4 is set in the lighting mode table during maintenance mode, and each time the RAM clear button is operated, it corresponds to "display number 1 → display number 2 → display number 3 ...". The frame decoration lamp D18-L (may be a game effect lamp D26) is lit in a lighting mode corresponding to the transitioned gaming state. As a specific example of the game state transition, when the RAM clear button is pressed and held for 10 seconds or more from the power-on state, it is a game state corresponding to display number 1, a non-probability variable game state and a non-time reduction game state. (The main game probability change flag is off and the main game time reduction flag is off), and the frame decoration lamp D18-L (may be the game effect lamp D26) is lit in red, which is the lighting mode corresponding to the game state. To do. After that, when the RAM clear button is pressed, the state is changed to the non-probability variable game state and the time shortening game state (the main game probability change flag is off and the main game time reduction flag is on), and the lighting mode corresponding to the game state is changed. The frame decoration lamp D18-L (which may be the game effect lamp D26) is turned on in blue. After that, when the RAM clear button is pressed, the state is changed to the probability fluctuation game state and the non-time reduction game state (the main game probability change flag is on and the main game time reduction flag is off), and the lighting mode corresponding to the game state is changed. The frame decoration lamp D18-L (which may be the game effect lamp D26) is turned on in green. After that, when the RAM clear button is pressed, the game is changed to the probability fluctuation game state and the time reduction game state (the main game probability change flag is on and the main game time reduction flag is on), and the lighting mode corresponding to the game state is used. The frame decoration lamp D18-L (which may be the game effect lamp D26) is turned on in a certain yellow color. When the RAM clear button is pressed in the gaming state corresponding to the display number 4, the gaming state corresponds to the display number 1 and the lighting mode is red corresponding to the gaming state. The frame decoration lamp D18-L (which may be the game effect lamp D26) is turned on. As described above, in the change example 2 from the third embodiment, the game state can be changed each time the RAM clear button is pressed during the maintenance mode. Even when you want to check the base value in the variable game state and the time reduction game state, after changing the game state to the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state, you can operate the launch handle to obtain the probability variation game state and the time reduction. You can check the base value in the game state. Further, by differentiating the lighting mode of the frame decoration lamp D18-L (which may be the game effect lamp D26) depending on the game state, it becomes clear at a glance which game state is currently in, and the work of confirming the base value becomes easier. .. In the second change example from the third implementation, the game state is changed each time the RAM clear button is pressed during the maintenance mode, and the frame decoration lamp D18-L (also as the game effect lamp D26) is changed depending on the game state. The lighting mode of (good) is different, but the lighting mode is not limited to this, and the game state is not changed even if the RAM clear button is operated during the maintenance mode. The lighting mode of −L (which may be the game effect lamp D26) may be different, that is, the gaming state may be discriminated by the lighting mode of the frame decoration lamp D18-L (which may be the game effect lamp D26). .. Further, the configuration for determining the game state is not limited to the lighting mode of the frame decoration lamp D18-L (may be the game effect lamp D26), and for example, (1) the type of sound output from the speaker D24. , (2) Display mode by the effect display device SG, (3) Launch strength of the launch handle D44 (Intensity low → Judged to be left-handed → Judged to be in a non-time reduction game state, Strong strength → Right-handed It may be possible to determine the gaming state by configuring such as (determining that the player is present → determining that the game state is shortened).

With the above configuration, according to the gaming machine according to the second modification from the third embodiment, the information related to the ball entry can be obtained by pressing and holding the RAM clear button while the power is on. The displayable maintenance mode is configured to start, the game state is changed each time the RAM clear button is pressed during the maintenance mode, and the frame decoration lamp (game effect lamp D26) is lit in a lighting mode corresponding to the changed game state. Even if you want to check the base value for a predetermined period in any gaming state by configuring it to light up, you can check it by simply operating the firing handle after changing to any gaming state. Will be able to.

Further, in the second modification from the third embodiment, the information related to the ball entry according to the game state can be confirmed, but the non-time shortened game state (non-probability variation) is displayed as the display of the information related to the ball entry. The number of prizes won only in the gaming state and the non-probability shortened gaming state and the probability fluctuating gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state is displayed, or the time shortening gaming state (non-probability variable gaming state and the time shortening gaming state) , The number of winnings may be displayed only in the probability-variable gaming state and the time-shortening gaming state).

Further, in the second modification from the third embodiment, the number of game balls entered into the starting opening, the number of game balls entered in the general winning opening, and the total number of prize balls paid out are displayed as information related to the entry. Cumulative number of prize balls paid out), number of prize balls paid out in non-probability variable game state and non-time shortened game state (or cumulative number of prize balls paid out), number of prize balls paid out in time shortened game state (or cumulative prizes) The number of balls paid out) may be configured to be displayable in the maintenance mode. Further, the big winning opening may be opened even in the maintenance mode (it may be configured to win a big hit, or it may be configured to be forced to win a big hit).

(Example 3 of change from the third embodiment)
In the third embodiment, in the maintenance mode, the effect display device on the sub-control board S side is configured to execute the display related to the maintenance mode, but the execution mode of the maintenance mode is not limited to this. Therefore, a configuration that is an execution mode of the maintenance mode different from the third embodiment is referred to as a change example 3 from the third embodiment, and the changes from the third embodiment will be described in detail below.

Next, FIG. 76 is a main flowchart on the main control board M side in the third modification from the third embodiment. The change from the third embodiment is step 2300 (third variation 3) in the process of FIG. 3B. That is, in FIG. 3B, after executing the special game control process in step 1600, the main control board M executes the maintenance mode execution process described later in step 2300 (third variation 3), and step 1900. Executes fraud detection information management processing.

Next, FIG. 77 is a flowchart of the main game start opening ball entry detection process according to the subroutine of step 2200 of FIG. 9 in the third modification from the third embodiment. The changes from the third embodiment are Step 2215-5 (3rd variation 3), Step 2212-6 (3rd variation 3), Step 2231-5 (3rd variation 3), and Step 2231-6 (3rd variation 3). The third variation 3). That is, after turning on the first main game start port detection continuation flag in step 2210, in step 2212-5 (third variation 3), the first main game start port entry determination means MJ11-A operates the handle. Determines if the medium flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2212-5 (third variation 3), in step 2212-6 (third variation 3), the first main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-A is the start port entry number counter MJ12c. 1 is added to the counter value, and the process proceeds to step 2222. On the other hand, even if No in step 2212-5 (third variation 3), the process proceeds to step 2222.

Further, after turning on the second main game start port detection continuation flag in step 2230, in step 2231-5 (third variation 3), the second main game start port entry determination means MJ11-B is operating the handle. Determine if the flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2231-5 (third variation 3), in step 2231-6 (third variation 3), the second main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ1
In 1-B, 1 is added to the counter value of the starting port entry number counter MJ12c, and the process proceeds to step 2240. On the other hand, even if No in step 2231-5 (third variation 3), the process proceeds to step 2240. With this configuration, it is possible to count the number of game balls that have entered the first main game start port A10 or the second main game start port B10 when the player is operating the launch handle D44. It becomes.

Next, FIG. 78 is a flowchart of the general winning opening winning ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2400 of FIG. 9 in the modification 3 from the third embodiment. The changes from the third embodiment are steps 2411-5 (third variation 3) and steps 2411-6 (third variation 3). That is, in step 2410, the general winning opening detection continuation flag is turned on, and in step 2411-5 (third variation 3), the general winning opening entry determination means MJ11-P has whether or not the steering wheel operating flag is on. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2411-5 (third variation 3), in step 2411-6 (third variation 3), the general winning opening entry determination means MJ11-P sets the counter value of the general entry number counter MJ13c to 1. Is added (incremented), and the process proceeds to step 2420. On the other hand, even if No in step 2411-5 (third variation 3), the process proceeds to step 2420.

Next, FIG. 79 is a flowchart of the maintenance mode execution process according to the subroutine of step 2300 (third variation 1) of FIG. 71 in the modification 3 from the third embodiment. The change from the change example 1 from the third embodiment is step 2100 (third change 3), that is, when the operation of the firing handle D44 is completed in step 2334, step 2100 (third change 3). ), The ball entry number determination process described later is executed, and the handle operating flag is turned off in step 2340.

Next, FIG. 80 is a flowchart of the ball entry number determination process according to the subroutine of step 2100 (third variation 3) of FIG. 79 in the modification 3 from the third embodiment. First, in step 2116, the maintenance mode control means MO calculates "starting port entry number counter value / general entry number counter value" as the entry ratio N. Next, in step 2118, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not the ball entry ratio N is within a predetermined range (1/4 ≦ N ≦ 4). In the case of Yes in step 2118, in step 2120, the maintenance mode control means MO transmits a command that the ball entry ratio is normal to the sub control board S, so that the sub control board S sets the frame decoration lamp D18-L (game). The effect lamp D26 may be used) is turned on in the normal lighting mode, and the process proceeds to step 2124. On the other hand, if No in step 2118, in step 2122, the maintenance mode control means MO transmits a command in which the ball entry ratio is abnormal to the sub-control board S, so that the sub-control board S uses the frame decoration lamp D18-L. (The game effect lamp D26 may be used) is turned on in an abnormal lighting mode, and the process proceeds to step 2124. Next, in step 2124, the maintenance mode control means MO clears the counter value of the starting port entry number counter MJ12c and the counter value of the general entry number counter MJ13c to zero, and moves to the next process (process of step 2340). Transition. It should be noted that the ball entry ratio may be calculated based on the cumulative starting port entry number counter value and the general entry number counter value in which the launch handle is operated a plurality of times without providing the process of step 2124. ..

With the above configuration, according to the gaming machine according to the change example 3 from the third embodiment, by pressing and holding the RAM clear button while the power is on, the information related to the ball entry can be obtained. It is configured to start a displayable maintenance mode, and during the maintenance mode, the frame decoration lamp (as the game effect lamp D26) indicates whether the ball entry ratio between the main game start port and the general winning port is normal or abnormal. By configuring the notification in the lighting mode of (may be good), it is possible to confirm whether or not the entry status of the game ball (the status of the game nail) is normal with a simpler display.

In the third modification from the third embodiment, the cumulative number of balls entered from the start to the end of the maintenance mode may be notified by a device other than the effect display device. For example, when the power is on. The measurement of the cumulative number of winnings may be started from the timing when the long press of the RAM clear button is detected and the maintenance mode is started, and it may be configured to determine and notify whether the cumulative number of winnings exceeds the threshold value. As the notification mode, as described above, the notification may be performed by the lighting mode of the gaming machine frame, or may be configured to notify by the voice from the speaker. With this configuration, even in a pachinko gaming machine that does not have a liquid crystal such as a second-class pachinko gaming machine, it is possible to notify the information related to the ball entry by the lighting mode of the lamp and the voice.

(Example 4 of change from the third embodiment)
In the third embodiment, the display device related to the maintenance mode is configured to execute the display related to the maintenance mode on the effect display device on the sub-control board S side in the maintenance mode, but the execution mode in which the maintenance mode is executed on the sub-control board S is It is not limited to this. Therefore, a configuration that is an execution mode of the maintenance mode different from the third embodiment is referred to as a change example 4 from the third embodiment, and the changes from the third embodiment will be described in detail below.

Next, FIG. 81 is a flowchart of the main game start opening ball entry detection process according to the subroutine of step 2200 of FIG. 9 in the fourth modification from the third embodiment. The changes from the third embodiment are step 2212-4 (third variation 4) and step 2231-4 (third variation 4). That is, after turning on the first main game start port detection continuation flag in step 2210, in step 2212-4 (third variation 4), the first main game start port entry determination means MJ11-A uses the start port. A ball entry command (command to the sub-control board S side) is set, and the process proceeds to step 2222. Further, in step 2230, the second main game start port entry determination means MJ11-B turns on the second main game start port detection continuation flag, and in step 2231-4 (third variation 4), the second main game The start port entry determination means MJ11-B sets a start port entry command (command to the sub-control board S side), and proceeds to the process of step 2240.

Next, FIG. 82 is a flowchart of the general winning opening winning ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2400 of FIG. 9 in the modification 4 from the third embodiment. The change from the third embodiment is step 2411-4 (third variation 4). That is, after turning on the general winning opening detection continuation flag in step 2410, in step 2411-4 (third variation 4), the general winning opening entry determination means MJ11-P uses the general winning opening command (sub-control board). The command to the S side) is set, and the process proceeds to step 2420.

Next, FIG. 83 is a flowchart of the ejection ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. 9 in the fourth modification from the third embodiment. The change from this embodiment is step 2509-4 (3rd variation 4). That is, in step 2508, after adding 1 to the counter value of the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90, in step 2509-4 (third variation 4), the total discharge ball confirmation means MJ11-C90 uses the discharge ball command ( The command to the sub-control board S side) is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2600).

Next, FIG. 84 is a flowchart of the maintenance mode execution process according to the subroutine of step 2300 (third variation 4) of FIG. 69 in the modification 4 from the third embodiment. First, in step 2342, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not the maintenance mode flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2342, in step 2343, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not there is a predetermined operation of the RAM clear button (for example, long press for 10 seconds or more) (only long press started from the power-on state). Is determined, and if the operation that becomes Yes in step 1002 is executed, it does not become Yes in this process). In the case of Yes in step 2343, in step 2344, the maintenance mode control means MO is a maintenance mode start command (a command to the sub control board S side, and a command to start execution of the maintenance mode on the sub control board S side). ) Is set. Next, in step 2345, the maintenance mode control means MO turns on the maintenance mode flag and shifts to the next process (process of step 1900). Even if No in step 2342 or step 2343, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1900).

Next, FIG. 85 is a main flowchart of the sub-control board S side (particularly, the sub-main control unit SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth modification from the third embodiment. Introduction The changes from the present embodiment are step 5900 (third variation 4) in the figure (e). That is, in step 5900 (third variation 4), the sub-control board S executes the maintenance mode execution process, and shifts to the base determination process of step 5800 (second variation 2).

Next, FIG. 86 is a flowchart of the maintenance mode display process according to the subroutine of step 5900 (third and fourth) of FIG. 85 in the modification 4 from the third embodiment. First, in step 5908, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 refers to the inside of the flag area of the maintenance mode display-related information temporary storage means SM32b, and determines whether or not the maintenance mode display in-progress flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 5908, in step 5910, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the maintenance mode start command from the main control board M side has been received. .. In the case of Yes in step 5910, in step 5912, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 turns on the maintenance mode display in-flag area in the flag area of the maintenance mode display-related information temporary storage means SM32b. Next, in step 5914, a display indicating that the maintenance mode is set is displayed on the effect display device SG, and the process proceeds to step 5916. When the effect display device SG executes the display indicating that the maintenance mode is set, the display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area SG11, the hold display on the first main game side in the first hold display unit SG12, and the first 2 The display on the hold display unit SG13, such as the hold display on the second main game side, the display related to the error (error in which the door opening flag is turned on, etc.), etc., and the display indicating that the maintenance mode is set are configured so as not to overlap. Is desirable. On the other hand, even if No in step 5908, the process proceeds to step 5916. The maintenance mode display control means SM32 is possessed by the sub-control board S, and the sub-control board S side provides information related to the control process for starting the maintenance mode and the ball entry used in the maintenance mode. The maintenance mode display control means SM32 is configured to execute the calculation process and the like. Further, the maintenance mode display-related information temporary storage means SM32b is included in the sub-control board S, and temporarily stores information for execution by the maintenance mode display control means SM32.

Next, in step 5916, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 refers to the inside of the flag area of the maintenance mode display-related information temporary storage means SM32b, and is a base measurement flag (a flag that is turned on during the period when the base value is being measured). Determines if is off. In the case of Yes in step 5916, in step 5918, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 determines whether or not the sub-input button SB has been pressed. In the case of Yes in step 5918, in step 5920, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 is a base measurement timer SM32t (a timer for measuring the period during which the base value is being measured, and is located in the RAM area on the sub-control board S side. (Stored) is reset and started, and the timer value is displayed on the effect display device SG. Next, in step 5922, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 turns on the flag during base measurement in the flag area of the maintenance mode display-related information temporary storage means SM32b, and proceeds to step 5924. On the other hand, even if No in step 5916, the process proceeds to step 5924.

Next, in step 5924, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 determines whether or not the sub-input button SB has been pressed. In the case of Yes in step 5924, in step 5926, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 stops the base measurement timer SM32t and displays the timer value on the effect display device SG. When displaying the timer value of the base measurement timer SM32t on the effect display device SG, the display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area SG11, the hold display on the first main game side in the first hold display unit SG12, and the first 2 Hold display The display of the hold display on the second main game side, the display related to the error (error that the door opening flag is turned on, etc.), etc. on the second main game side and the display of the timer value of the base measurement timer SM32t do not overlap. It is desirable to configure. Next, in step 5928, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 displays the current base value (the base value during the period when the base measurement flag is on, and the base value calculated in step 5816 of FIG. 87). Display on the device SG. Next, in step 5930, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 turns off the base measurement flag in the flag area of the maintenance mode display-related information temporary storage means SM32b, and proceeds to the process of step 5932. In addition, even if No in step 5918 or step 5924, the process proceeds to step 5932.

Next, in step 5932, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 determines whether or not the maintenance mode has ended (as described above, the maintenance mode ends due to the occurrence of a power failure). In the case of Yes in step 5932, in step 5934, the display related to the maintenance mode on the effect display device SG is erased. Next, in step 5936, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 turns off the maintenance mode display in-progress flag, and proceeds to the next process {step 5800 (second variation 2)}. Even if No in step 5910 or step 5932, the process proceeds to the next process {step 5800 (second variation 2)}. In this example, the maintenance mode is configured to end when the power is turned off, but it is not limited to this, and it is configured to end by a predetermined operation for the sub input button SB or a predetermined operation for the RAM click button. May be good.

Next, FIG. 87 is a flowchart of the base determination process according to the subroutine of step 5800 (second and second) of FIG. 85 in the fourth modification from the third embodiment. The difference from the second modification from the second embodiment is step 5818 (third variation 4). That is, in step 5818 (third variation 4), the maintenance mode display control means SM32 determines whether or not the base measurement flag is on. If Yes in step 5818 (3rd variation 4), the process proceeds to step 5802. On the other hand, if No in step 5818 (3rd variation 4), the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 5100). With this configuration, in the change example 4 from the third embodiment, the base value is calculated only during the period when the base measurement in-progress flag is on.

With the above configuration, according to the gaming machine according to the change example 4 from the third embodiment, by pressing and holding the RAM clear button while the power is on, the information related to the ball entry can be obtained. The displayable maintenance mode is configured to start on the sub control board S side, and during the maintenance mode, the base value measurement is started by pressing the sub input button, and by pressing the sub input button again. By ending the measurement of the base value and configuring it to display the measured base value, it is possible to confirm the base value for an arbitrary predetermined period by executing a simple operation on the sub-control board S side. Become.

(Fourth Embodiment)
In the present embodiment, the ball entry status can be confirmed by displaying the information related to the ball entry by the ball entry status display device on the main control board M side, but the ball entry status is confirmed. Is not limited to this. Therefore, a configuration that is different from the present embodiment and is a mode for confirming the ball entry status is defined as the fourth embodiment, and the changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

Next, FIG. 88 is a flowchart of the external signal output process according to the subroutine of step 3500 of FIG. 8 in the fourth embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 3503 (fourth). That is, in step 3502, the external signal output control means MG uses the prize ball counter MHc {each entry port (first main game start port A10, second main game start port B10, general entry) to be paid out. Counter value of the cumulative number calculated after the power is turned on for the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the balls entered into the ball openings P10, the first large winning opening C10, and the second large winning opening C20). , Start port entry counter MJ12c (counter that measures the number of game balls that have entered the first main game start port A10 or the second main game start port B10 under specific circumstances), total discharge confirmation counter The counter value of MJ11c-C90 (counter that measures the number of game balls detected by the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s) and the general number of balls entered counter MJ13c (measures the number of game balls that have entered the general winning opening P10 under specific circumstances). Signals related to the counter value (in the fourth embodiment, the counter value of the number of prize balls, the counter value of the number of balls entering the starting port, the counter value of the total number of confirmed discharges, and the counter value of the total number of discharged balls) , The general number of balls entered counter value, is configured to be stored) is output from the external terminal, and the process proceeds to step 3504.

In the fourth embodiment, when the counter values of the prize ball number counter MHc, the starting port entry number counter MJ12c, the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90, and the general entry number counter MJ13c are increased by 1, 1 It may be configured to output a signal (it is preferable to apply this configuration to the starting port entry number counter MJ12c and the general entry number counter MJ13c, which are counters whose counter values tend to be relatively small. is there). Further, when the counter values of the prize ball number counter MHc, the start port entry number counter MJ12c, the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90, and the general entry number counter MJ13c each increase by 10, one signal is output. (It is preferable to apply the configuration to the total emission confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90 and the prize ball number counter MHc, which are counters whose counter values tend to be relatively large). Further, when the signal relating to the prize ball number counter MHc, the start port entry number counter MJ12c, the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90, and the general entry number counter MJ13c is configured to be output as output information from the external terminal. May be configured to output a signal (external terminal signal) from a different external terminal for each counter. With such a configuration, even when an external terminal signal that can output only on / off is used, it is possible to distinguish which counter the output information is related to. Further, the external terminal signal may be output only when the maintenance mode flag is on (maintenance mode is in progress).

With the above configuration, according to the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, the output information from the external terminal includes the prize ball number counter value, the starting port entry number counter value, and the total discharge confirmation number counter value. In addition, the general number of balls entered counter value can be output, and the information related to the number of balls entered can be confirmed from outside the gaming machine.

As a method of confirming the information related to the ball entry outside the game machine, it may be confirmed by using a collating machine. Specifically, a terminal for connecting the collating machine is provided on the main control board M side. By connecting the collating machine to the terminal, the serial signal from the main control board M side to the collating machine side (similar to the command transmitted from the main control board M to the sub control board S, the information type and information It may be configured so that a signal that can clearly indicate the content) can be output. The serial signal may be configured to be constantly output by the main control board M, or may be configured to be output when there is a request from the collating machine to output information related to ball entry.

Further, as another form of confirming the information related to the ball entry by the collating machine, the information related to the ball entry is managed on the sub control board S side, and the information related to the ball entry is managed on the sub control board S side. Is converted into a QR code and displayed on the effect display device SG, and the QR code is photographed by a collating machine and decoded, so that the information related to the ball entry can be confirmed by the collating machine.

(Fifth Embodiment)
In the present embodiment to the fourth embodiment, various aspects for confirming the information related to the ball entry have been described in detail, but the information related to the ball entry is configured to be memorable for several days. May be good. Therefore, the configuration in which the information related to the ball entry can be stored for several days is defined as the fifth embodiment, and the changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 89 is an overall electrical configuration diagram in the fifth embodiment, and the difference from the present embodiment is that the sub-main control unit SM has a real-time clock RTC that keeps measuring the current time by the built-in power supply. That is what you are doing. Here, the real-time clock RTC is a mechanism for measuring time, which is provided on the substrate of the sub-main control unit SM. The real-time clock RTC has a built-in power supply (battery) independent of the board, and keeps time even when power is not supplied to the game machine. Therefore, the date and time set at the time of shipment from the factory, etc. It is possible to supply the current date and time based on.

Next, FIG. 90 is a main flowchart on the main control board M side in the fifth embodiment. The change from the change example 1 from the third embodiment is step 2650 (fifth). That is, in step 3000, the main control board M executes the prize ball payout command transmission control process, and then in step 2650 (fifth), the main control board M executes the backup execution control process, and the outside of step 1990. Move to signal output processing.

Next, FIG. 91 is a flowchart of the backup execution control process according to the subroutine of step 2650 (fifth) of FIG. 90 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 2652, the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the total emission confirmation counter MJ11c-C90 is a predetermined number (10000) or more (the total emission confirmation counter value is cleared to zero by turning off the power). Therefore, the total emission confirmation number counter value measured from the power-on, that is, the base value is not stored when the number of times the game ball is fired does not reach 10,000 balls). In the case of Yes in step 2652, in step 2654, the main control board M determines whether or not the date has been newly changed. In the case of Yes in step 2654, in step 2656, the main control board M sets the next storage area and proceeds to step 2658. Even if No in step 2654, the process proceeds to step 2658. Next, in step 2658, the main control board M updates and stores the current base value in the set storage area number (updates and stores until today's final power off, and finally power off. The time data will be stored for 3 days), and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1990). On the other hand, even if No in step 2652, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1990).

The lower part of the figure is a base value storage image diagram, specifically, it has "1", "2", and "3" as storage area numbers, and in the table on the left side, it has "3" as storage area numbers. "Is set. Further, the storage area corresponding to the storage area number "1" stores the base value of March 25, and the storage area corresponding to the storage area number "2" stores the base value of March 27. The base value of March 28 is stored in the storage area corresponding to the storage area number "3". After that, the number of game balls launched on March 29, the next day (the number of game balls is almost the same as the number of ejected balls) became 10,000 or more, and the date was changed from March 28. , The storage area number changes from "3" to "1"("1" is set), and the base value (33) of March 29 is stored in the storage area corresponding to the storage area number "1". Become. The storage area number is configured to be set in the order of "1 → 2 → 3 → 1 ...". In addition, the base value of March 25 stored in the storage area corresponding to the storage area number "1" will be erased (overwritten). The configuration for backing up information related to ball entry such as the base value is not limited to this, and for example, the next storage area number may be set each time the power of the gaming machine is turned on. .. Further, it may be configured to have a counter for managing the storage area to be backed up, and 1 may be added to the counter value of the counter each time the power of the gaming machine is turned on.

With the above configuration, according to the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment, the base value is updated and stored at any time on business days when the total number of discharged balls is 10,000 or more, so that the number exceeds a predetermined number. It is possible to store information for three business days on the business day when the launch (10,000 or more balls) was executed.

In the fifth embodiment, the RTC is configured to be used, but by configuring in this way, it is possible to easily determine how many game balls are fired at what time.

In the fifth embodiment, the backup is executed on the condition that the total number of discharged balls reaches a predetermined number (10000 balls in this example), but when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the ball enters. It suffices to configure it to back up information, and there is no problem even if the predetermined conditions are changed. For example, a predetermined time may have passed as the period during which the game is being executed, a predetermined number or more of game balls have been launched, the cumulative number of prize balls paid out has reached a predetermined number, and the like. In addition, the backed up information may be deleted when a predetermined period elapses or a predetermined operation is executed. Specifically, as a predetermined operation for deleting the backed up information, the backed up information may be deleted when the power is turned off, or the backed up information may be deleted when the power is turned off and restored.
(Sixth Embodiment)
In the present embodiment to the fifth embodiment, the configuration in which the process of calculating the information related to the ball entry is executed by either the main control board M or the sub control board S has been described in detail. In any of the processes of the control board M and the sub-control board S, the information related to the ball entry may be calculated. Therefore, such a configuration will be referred to as a sixth embodiment, and only the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

Next, FIG. 92 is a main flowchart on the main control board M side in the sixth embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 2750 (sixth). That is, after executing the ball entry number determination process in step 2100, the main control board M executes the main game discharge number confirmation process in step 2750 (sixth), and shifts to the fraud detection information management process in step 1900. ..

Next, FIG. 93 is a flowchart of the main game start opening ball entry detection process according to the subroutine of step 2200 of FIG. 9 in the sixth embodiment. The differences from the present embodiment are step 2212-3, step 2212-5 (sixth), step 2231-3, and step 2231-5 (sixth). That is, after turning on the first main game start port detection continuation flag in step 2210, in step 2212-3, the first main game start port entry determination means MJ11-A is a counter of the start opening entry number counter MJ12c. Add 1 to the value. Next, in step 2212-5 (sixth), the first main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-A sets a start port entry command (command to the sub-control board S side), and in step 2222. Move to processing.

Further, in step 2230, after turning on the second main game start port detection continuation flag, in step 2231-3, the second main game start port entry determination means MJ11-B uses the start opening entry number counter MJ12c. Add 1 to the counter value. Next, in step 2231-5 (sixth), the second main game start port entry ball determination means MJ11-B sets a start port entry command (command to the sub-control board S side), and in step 2240. Move to processing.

Next, FIG. 94 is a flowchart of the general winning opening winning ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2400 of FIG. 9 in the sixth embodiment. The differences from the present embodiment are step 2411-3 and step 2411-5 (sixth). That is, after turning on the general winning opening detection continuation flag in step 2410, in step 2411-3, the general winning opening entry determination means MJ11-P adds 1 to the counter value of the general winning opening number counter MJ13c. Next, in step 2411-5 (sixth), the general winning opening ball entry determination means MJ11-P sets a general ball entry command (command to the sub-control board S side), and proceeds to the process of step 2420. ..

Next, FIG. 95 is a flowchart of the ejection ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. 9 in the sixth embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 2509-5 (sixth). That is, in step 2508, after adding 1 to the counter value of the total discharge confirmation number counter MJ11c-90, in step 2509-5 (sixth), the total discharge confirmation means MJ11-C90 uses the discharge ball command (sub-control board). The command to the S side) is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2600).

Next, FIG. 96 is a flowchart of the ball entry determination process according to the subroutine of step 2100 of FIG. 92 in the sixth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2104 (sixth), that is, after calculating the total number of balls G in step 2102, the maintenance mode control means MO is totaled in step 2104 (sixth). It is determined whether or not the number of balls G has reached a multiple of a predetermined value (6000 in this example). If Yes in step 2104 (sixth), the ball entry ratio N is calculated in step 2106, and if No in step 2104, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 2750 (sixth)}. With this configuration, every time the total number of balls entered in the starting opening and the general winning opening reaches a multiple of 6000 balls, a display relating to whether or not the winning ratio is within a predetermined range. Can be executed.

Next, FIG. 97 is a flowchart of the main game discharge number confirmation process according to the subroutine of step 2750 (sixth) of FIG. 92 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 2752, in the maintenance mode control means MO, the counter value of the total emission confirmation number counter MJ11c-C90 is a confirmation value (total emission number measured on the main control board M side and total emission calculated on the sub control board S side). It is a counter value for confirming whether or not the numbers are the same, and in this example, it is determined whether or not a multiple of 6000) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2752, in step 2754, the maintenance mode control means MO is a total discharge ball confirmation command (a command to the sub control board S side and includes information related to the total discharge confirmation number counter value). Is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1900). Even if No in step 2752, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1900).

Next, FIG. 98 is a main flowchart of the sub-control board S side (particularly, the sub-main control unit SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. The differences from the present embodiment are step 5850 (sixth), step 5950 (sixth), and step 6050 (sixth) in the figure (e). That is, in step 5850 (sixth), the sub-control board S executes the sub-game entry confirmation process described later. Next, in step 5950 (sixth), the sub-control board S executes a sub-game entry number determination process, which will be described later. Next, in step 6050 (sixth), the sub-control board S executes the sub-game side emission number confirmation process described later, and shifts to the hold information management process of step 5100.

Next, FIG. 99 is a flowchart of the sub-game entry confirmation process according to the subroutine of step 5850 (sixth) of FIG. 98 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 5852, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not a start port entry command from the main control board M side has been received. In the case of Yes in step 5852, in step 5854, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 uses the sub-side start port entry counter SJ11c (from the main control board M side, under certain circumstances, the first main game start port A10 or 1 is added to the counter value of (a counter that executes addition processing based on information related to the number of game balls that have entered the second main game start port B10 and is stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S). , The process proceeds to step 5856. On the other hand, even if No in step 5852, the process proceeds to step 5856. Next, in step 5856, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not a general entry command from the main control board M side has been received. In the case of Yes in step 5856, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 relates to the number of game balls entered into the general winning opening P10 under a specific situation from the sub-side general entry number counter SJ13c (from the main control board M side). 1 is added to the counter value (which is a counter that executes the addition process based on the information and is stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S), and the process proceeds to step 5860. On the other hand, in the case of step 5856 No, the process proceeds to step 5860.

Next, in step 5860, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the discharge ball command from the main control board M side has been received. In the case of Yes in step 5860, in step 5862, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 uses the sub-side total discharge confirmation number counter SJ10c (based on the number of game balls detected by the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s from the main control board M side). 1 is added to the counter value (which is a counter that executes the addition process and is stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S), and the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 5950 (sixth)}. On the other hand, even if No in step 5860, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 5950 (sixth)}. With this configuration, when the start port entry command, general entry command, and discharge ball command from the main control board M side are received, the start port on the sub control board S side (first main game). It is possible to execute addition processing to the counter values of the counters related to the entry into the starting port A10 and the second main game starting opening B10), the counters related to the entry into the general winning opening P, and the counters related to the ejection balls. It will be possible.

Next, FIG. 100 is a flowchart of the sub-game entry number determination process according to the subroutine of step 5950 (sixth) of FIG. 98 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 5952, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 executes an addition process of the counter value of the sub-side start port entry number counter SJ11c and the counter value of the sub-side general entry number counter SJ13c, and the total number of balls entered. Calculate GS. Next, in step 5954, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 determines whether or not the total number of balls entered GS has reached a multiple of a predetermined value (1500). In the case of Yes in step 5954, in step 5965, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 calculates (sub-side start port number of balls counter value / sub-side general number of balls counter value) as the ball entry ratio NS. Although the details will be described later, the total number of balls entered G on the main control board M side is determined every 6000 balls, whereas the total number of balls entered GS on the sub control board S side is every 1500 balls. The determination interval is shorter (the number of determinations is larger) on the sub-control board S side.

Next, in step 5598, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 determines whether or not the ball entry ratio NS is within a predetermined range (1/4 ≦ N ≦ 4). In the case of Yes in step 5598, in step 5960, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 displays a normal display (for example, a small circle is displayed in the lower right row of the display area, nothing is displayed, etc.) on the effect display device SG. , The process proceeds to the next process {process of step 6050 (sixth)}. On the other hand, if No in step 5598, in step 5962, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 displays an abnormality display (for example, a small × is displayed in the lower right row of the display area) on the effect display device SG, and the next process is performed. The process proceeds to {process of step 6050 (sixth)}. Further, even if No in step 5954, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 6050 (sixth)}.

Next, FIG. 101 is a flowchart of the sub-game side emission number confirmation process according to the subroutine of step 6050 (sixth) of FIG. 98 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 6052, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the discharge confirmation command from the main control board M side has been received. In the case of Yes in step 6052, in step 6054, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 determines whether or not “total discharge confirmation number counter value = sub-side total discharge confirmation number counter value”. In the case of Yes in step 6054, in step 6056, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 displays the discharge normal display on the effect display device, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 5100). On the other hand, if No in step 6054, in step 6058, the maintenance mode display control means SM32 displays the discharge abnormality display on the effect display device SG, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 5100). Even if No in step 6052, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 5100). As described above, in the sixth embodiment, every time the discharge balls of 6000 balls are detected on the main control board M side, the detection on the main control board M side and the detection on the sub control board S side coincide with each other. It is configured to check if it is. That is, the main control board M side and the sub control board S side are configured to independently measure the discharge balls.

With the above configuration, according to the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment, the process of calculating the information related to the ball entry is executed by the main control board M and the sub control board S, respectively, and the total number of discharged balls is increased. Every time a predetermined number (6000 balls in this example) is reached, the sub is based on the total number of emissions measured by the main control board M and the information transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. By configuring so as to confirm whether the total number of ejected balls calculated on the control board S side matches, it is possible to confirm whether the information relating to the entry of balls is correct information. Further, since the free space of the data capacity used by the sub-control board S is larger than that of the main control board M, in the processing on the main control board M side, the information related to the entry of balls is updated every 6000 balls. In the processing on the sub control board S side, the information related to the ball entry is updated every 1500 balls, which is less than that on the main control board M side, and the information related to the ball entry can be confirmed in more detail. ..

Further, every time the total number of discharged balls reaches a predetermined number (6000 balls in this example), the main control board M and the sub control board S confirm the information related to the ball entry on the main control board M side. It may be configured to determine whether or not the total number of confirmed discharge counter values and the total number of balls entered GS on the sub-control board S side match. With this configuration, in order to prevent the discovery of information related to illegal ball entry due to illegally changing the direction of the game nail (for example, information in which the ball entry ratio N is in an abnormal range). When a rod-shaped member is taken in and out near the general winning opening ball detection device P11s and the general winning opening ball detecting device P11s repeats "off → on", the main control board M side to the sub control board S side By transmitting a general ball entry command, which is information that the ball has entered the general winning opening P10, the total number of balls entered GS on the sub control board S side will be added, but the main control Since the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s does not detect the game ball on the board M side, the information related to the total discharge number (total discharge confirmation number counter value) on the main control board M side is not added, and the rod shape is formed. When the member is taken in and out near the general winning opening ball entry detection device P11s, the total number of balls ejected on the main control board M side and the total number of balls entered on the sub control board S side do not match, and fraud is discovered. Become.

(7th Embodiment)
In the present embodiment to the sixth embodiment, various configurations for confirming information related to ball entry have been described in detail, but in order to disguise these information, for example, information related to abnormal ball entry If is confirmed, there is a risk that the RAM clear will be executed and erased without storing the abnormal information. Therefore, a configuration that can take measures even in such a situation is defined as the seventh embodiment, and the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 102 is a main flowchart of the sub-control board S side (particularly, the sub-main control unit SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 6100 (7th) in the figure (e). That is, after executing the error notification execution process in step 5700, the sub-control board S executes the RAM clear backup process described later in step 6100 (7th), and shifts to the process of step 5020.

Next, FIG. 103 is a flowchart of the RAM clear backup process according to the subroutine of step 6100 (7th) of FIG. 102 in the seventh embodiment. First, in step 6102, the sub-control board S determines whether or not the RAM clear information from the main control board M side has been received. In the case of Yes in step 6102, in step 6104, the sub-main control unit SM adds 1 to the counter value of the RAM clear count counter SRc, stores the counter value, and performs the next process (process in step 5020). Move to. On the other hand, even if No in step 6102, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 5020). As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the number of times the RAM is cleared is stored on the sub-control board S side. In the area for storing the counter value of the RAM clear count counter SRc in step 6104, the power is turned off or the RAM is cleared by operating the power switch Ea or the RAM clear button even if any artificial operation occurs (the power switch Ea or the RAM clear button is operated). It is configured to be an area that cannot be erased (for example, a ferroelectric memory).

With the above configuration, according to the gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment, the number of times the RAM is cleared is stored on the sub-control board S side, so that the information related to the abnormal ball entry is stored. When is confirmed, even if RAM clear is executed and erased without storing the abnormal information, the number of RAM clear executions is stored on the sub-control board S side and RAM clear is executed. However, by configuring so that the RAM clear execution count is not erased, it is possible to configure so that an illegal information operation cannot be executed.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, the number of times of RAM clear stored in the sub-control board S may be displayed on the effect display device SG during the execution of the maintenance mode, and is configured as such. In that case, if the number of RAM clears to be displayed exceeds the predetermined number, it is determined that an illegal RAM clear is being executed, and the display of the effect or the like cannot be displayed on the effect display device SG. (Because all the displays related to the normal game progress cannot be displayed, it cannot be used at the time of business). Further, the RTC described above may be used to store not only the number of times the RAM is cleared but also the date and time when the RAM is cleared.

(8th Embodiment)
In the present embodiment, the configuration in which the information related to the ball entry is calculated on the main control board M and displayed on the main control board M based on the calculated information has been described in detail. The configuration in which all the information calculation and display processing is executed on the main control board M is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment. Therefore, a configuration different from the present embodiment is set as the eighth embodiment as a configuration in which all the calculation and display processing of the information related to the ball entry is executed on the main control board M, and only the differences from the present embodiment are described below. , Will be described in detail.

First, FIG. 104 is an example of a diagram showing a structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is that the ball entry state display device J10 is provided on the main control board M. This ball entry status display device J10 is attached with a 4-digit 7-segment display aligned in "2 digits + 2 digits". For example, the continuous accessory ratio and the accessory ratio, which will be described later, or their cumulative total are displayed. It is configured to be displayable. The ball entry status display device J10 in the figure is provided on the surface of the main control board M in the back side direction, and the door unit D18 is unlocked with the key possessed by the game hall side to unlock the door unit. Since it is necessary to open the D18 and check the boards attached to the back surface of the door unit D18 (game board), the player cannot check the boards.

<Processing in the 1st ROM / RAM area>
Next, FIG. 105 is a main flowchart on the main control board M side in the eighth embodiment. The differences from the present embodiment are step 1034 (8th), step 2850 (8th), and step 1036 (8th). That is, after executing the processes of steps 2000 to 1600 as the processes in the first ROM / RAM area, the main control board M calls the processes in the second ROM / RAM area in step 1034 (8th).

<Processing in the 2nd ROM / RAM area>
Next, in step 2850 (eighth), the main control board M executes a ball entry state calculation process, which will be described later, which is a process in the second ROM / RAM area. Next, in step 1036 (eighth), the main control board M returns to the caller of the first ROM / RAM area, and then the processes of steps 1900 to 1990 are executed as the processes in the first ROM / RAM area. It will be.

<Processing in the 1st ROM / RAM area>
Next, FIG. 106 is a flowchart of the prize ball number determination process according to the subroutine of step 2700 of FIG. 9 in the eighth embodiment. The differences from the present embodiment are step 2706-6 (8th), step 2716-6 (8th), step 2731 (8th), and step 2736-6 (8th). That is, in step 2704, the prize ball payout determining means MH adds the number of prize ball payouts (3 in this example) related to the first main game start port to the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc, and then steps 2706. In -6 (8th), the prize ball payout determination means MH enters the non-role counter value MHc-4 (the first main game start port A10 in which the electric accessory is not provided and the general prize ball P10). The number of prize balls paid out (3 in this example) related to the first main game start port is added to the counter value (which is a counter for measuring the number of game balls and is stored in the RAM area on the main control board M side). Then, the process proceeds to step 2708.

<Processing in the 1st ROM / RAM area>
Further, in step 2714, the prize ball payout determining means MH adds the number of prize ball payouts (3 in this example) related to the second main game start port to the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc, and then steps 2716. In -6 (8th), the prize ball payout determination means MH is a counter value MHc-5 (a counter that measures the number of game balls that have entered the second main game start port B20 provided with the electric accessory. The number of prize balls paid out (3 in this example) related to the second main game start port is added to the counter value (stored in the RAM area on the main control board M side), and the process proceeds to step 2718. To do. Further, in step 2728, the prize ball payout determining means MH temporarily stores in the unpaid prize ball information temporary storage means MHb the information that the prize balls to be paid out related to the first (second) large winning opening are temporarily stored, and then, after that, In step 2731 (8th), the prize ball payout determination means MH measures the number of game balls entered into the continuous accessory counter value MHc-6 (first prize opening C10 and second prize opening C20). (Stored in the RAM area on the M side of the main control board), the number of prize balls paid out (13 in this example) related to the first (second) large winning opening is added to the process of step 2732. Transition.

<Processing in the 1st ROM / RAM area>
Further, in step 2734, the prize ball payout determining means MH adds the number of prize balls paid out (10 in this example) related to the general winning opening to the counter value of the prize ball number counter MHc, and then steps 2736-6 (in this example). In the eighth), the prize ball payout determining means MH adds the number of prize ball payouts (10 in this example) related to the general winning opening to the counter value of the non-role counter value MHc-4, and performs the process of step 2738. Transition. With this configuration, it is possible to calculate the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio, which will be described later. In addition, the prize ratio is the number of prize balls paid out by the large winning opening for all the winning balls paid out and the prize by the winning opening (in this example, the second main game start opening B10) provided with the ordinary electric accessory. This is the ratio of the number of balls paid out. In this example, the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10, the first prize opening C10 (second big prize opening C20), and the general prize opening P10. The total number of prize balls paid out at the second main game start opening B10 and the first big winning opening C10 (second big winning opening C20) is the ratio of the total number of prize balls paid out. The continuous bonus ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out by the large winning openings to the total number of prize balls paid out. In this example, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 And the total number of prize balls paid out of the 1st prize opening C10 (2nd prize opening C20) and the general prize opening P10, the number of prize balls paid out of the 1st prize opening C10 (2nd prize opening C20) It is a percentage of the total. Strictly speaking, the continuous bonus ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out by the large winning opening when the condition device operation flag is turned on to the total number of prize balls paid out. When calculating the continuous bonus ratio as described above, two ring buffers for storing the number of prize balls paid out in the large winning opening are provided, and one of the ring buffers has the condition device operation flag turned on. The number of prize balls paid out by the big prize opening (the number of prize balls paid out by the big hit) is stored, and the number of prize balls paid out by the big winning opening when the condition device operation flag is off (depending on the small hit) is stored in the other ring buffer. It may be configured to calculate (store) the continuous bonus ratio by storing the prize ball payout number).

<Processing in the 1st ROM / RAM area>
Next, FIG. 107 is a flowchart of the discharge ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2500 of FIG. 9 in the eighth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is that the present embodiment is in a non-probability variation game state and a non-time reduction game state (the main game probability change flag is off and the main game time reduction flag is off), and the special game is being executed. When there is no (condition device operation flag is off), when the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s detects a game ball, 1 is added to the total discharge confirmation counter value, so that total discharge is performed regardless of the game state, etc. When the confirmation sensor C90s detects a game ball, 1 is added to the total emission confirmation number counter value. Since the process is only deleted from this embodiment, detailed explanation is omitted.

<Processing in the 2nd ROM / RAM area>
Next, FIG. 108 is a flowchart of the ball entry state calculation process according to the subroutine of step 2850 (eighth) of FIG. 105 in the eighth embodiment. First, in step 2852, the maintenance mode control means MO determines whether or not the counter value of the total emission confirmation number counter MJ11c-90 has reached a multiple of a predetermined value (1000 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 2852, in step 2854, the maintenance mode control means MO sets the bonus ratio to "(feature counter value + continuous bonus counter value) / (feature counter value + continuous bonus counter value + non". The accessory counter value) × 100 ”is calculated. Next, in step 2856, the maintenance mode control means MO calculates "continuous bonus counter value / (continuous bonus counter value + continuous bonus counter value + non-feature counter value) x 100" as the continuous bonus ratio. To do. Next, in step 2858, the maintenance mode control means MO displays the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio calculated in steps 2854 and 2856 on the ball entry state display device J10, and the next process {step 1036 (first step 1036). 8)}. Even if No in step 2852, the process proceeds to the next process {step 1036 (8th)}. As described above, in the eighth embodiment, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated every time the number of discharged balls becomes a multiple of 1000 balls, and are displayed on the ball entry state display device J10 in the display mode described later. It is configured as. In the eighth embodiment, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio calculated in steps 2854 and 2856 are displayed on the ball entry status display device J10, but when they are displayed in a two-digit 7-segment display. Since it is rare that the result of calculating the bonus ratio or the continuous bonus ratio is an integer, the result of calculating the bonus ratio or the continuous bonus ratio is rounded off to the nearest whole number, etc. 2 The ball entry status display device J10 may be configured to display a digit integer.

Next, FIG. 109 is an image diagram of the entry information backup in the eighth embodiment. Similar to the fifth embodiment described above, the gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment may be configured to store (back up) information related to entering balls every time a predetermined number of gaming balls are launched. An example of the case of the above configuration is shown in the figure. In the figure, every time the number of discharged balls becomes 6000, in other words, every time the total number of confirmed discharge counter values becomes a multiple of 6000, the information related to the incoming ball is stored. Since the total emission confirmation counter MJ11c-90 is configured to be measurable when all the fired game balls are ejected, when the total emission confirmation counter value is a multiple of 6000 balls. Can be regarded as a game ball being fired in multiples of 6000 balls. In the case of a general pachinko machine, the number of game balls that is substantially the same as the number of game balls fired is paid out as the total number of prize balls paid out, that is, the number of game balls that is about 100% of the number of game balls fired. Is configured to be paid out as the total number of prize balls paid out, so that the total number of launched balls can be regarded as substantially the same as the total number of prize balls paid out. In addition, even in a gaming machine configured so that about 90% of the number of launched game balls is paid out as the total number of prize balls paid out, by setting "total number of prize balls paid out x 100/90". It is possible to calculate the approximate number of game balls fired.

In addition, as the information related to the entry of balls that the ejected balls store for every 6000 balls, the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on the entry into the general winning opening P10 and the prize based on the entry into the first main game start opening A10. Cumulative number of ball payouts, total number of prize balls paid out based on entry into the second main game start port B10 (provided with the second main game start port electric accessory B11d), first large prize opening C10 and There are the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on the balls entered into the second major winning opening C20, and the total number of prize balls paid out for the above four items. It is configured to be stored in the ring buffer using bytes. In this example, a ring buffer that can store 10 pieces of information for each output ball that is a multiple of 6000 balls is used, and 6000 new discharge balls are stored in a state where 10 pieces of information are stored. When it becomes a multiple of the sphere, the oldest stored information (information corresponding to "1" in the figure) is deleted and new information is stored (stored in "1" in the figure). It is configured to.

Further, based on the information stored in the ring buffer described above, information relating to the cumulative number of prize balls paid out for 10 pieces stored in the ring buffer is stored using 3 bytes. In addition, information older than 10 will be deleted from the ring buffer, but the total number of prizes including the information stored in the past will be calculated by referring to the information at any time before the information is deleted. Such information is also configured to be stored using 3 bytes. In addition, the continuous bonus ratio and the bonus ratio of the information related to the cumulative number of prize balls paid out for 10 pieces, which will be calculated based on the information related to the cumulative number of prize balls paid out for 10 pieces. , Each uses 1 byte to memorize. In addition, the continuous bonus ratio and the bonus ratio of the information related to the total cumulative number of prizes, which will be calculated based on the information related to the total cumulative number of prizes, are stored using 1 byte each. .. When three pieces of data are stored as the data stored in the ring buffer (when the data for one round of the ring buffer is not stored), for example, the prize ball payout related to the general winning opening P10 When the data of "1: 500 balls, 2: 600 balls, 3: 500 balls" is stored as the number, the data of the cumulative number of prize balls paid out for 10 sets related to the general winning opening P10 is ". Data indicating that "500 + 600 + 500 = 1600 balls" is stored, and data indicating that the total number of prize balls paid out is "500 + 600 + 500 = 1600 balls" is stored, and 10 sets of cumulative prizes are stored. The data on the number of balls paid out and the data on the total number of prize balls paid out are the same number of prize balls. On the other hand, when 12 pieces of data are stored as the data stored in the ring buffer (when more data is stored after the data for one round of the ring buffer is stored), for example, in general. As the number of prize balls to be paid out related to the winning opening P10, "1: 500 balls, 2: 600 balls, 3: 500 balls, 4: 600 balls, 5: 500 balls, 6:70 balls".
When the data of "0 balls, 7:500 balls, 8:600 balls, 9:500 balls, 10:400 balls" is stored, the cumulative number of prize balls paid out for 10 sets related to the general winning opening P10. The data is stored as "500 + 600 + 500 + 600 + 500 + 700 + 500 + 600 + 500 + 400 = 5400 balls", and the total total number of prize balls paid out is the data for the past two erased from the ring buffer in addition to the above 5400 balls. The data of "500 balls" and "800 balls" are added, that is, the data that "5400 + 500 + 800 = 6700 balls" is stored, and the data of the total number of prize balls paid out for 10 sets and the total The number of prize balls is different from the data of the total number of prize balls paid out.

Next, FIG. 110 is a display example of the ball entry state display device in the eighth embodiment. First, the upper part of the figure is an example of the display mode of the ball entry state display device J10 in the eighth embodiment. As described above, the ball entry status display device J10 in the eighth embodiment is provided on the surface of the main control board M in the back side direction, and the door unit D18 is unlocked by the key possessed by the game hall side. Since it is necessary to lock and open the door unit D18 and check the substrates attached to the back surface of the door unit D18 (game board), the player cannot check the boards.

The ball entry status display device J10 is configured to display in 4 bits of the upper 2 digits and the lower 2 digits, and is configured to start the display when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. In addition, what is displayed is (a) the ratio of continuous characters when 60,000 balls are fired, (b) the ratio of characters when 60,000 balls are fired, (c) the ratio of continuous characters in total, and (d) the cumulative total. There are four types of accessory ratios, and after the gaming machine is turned on, it is switched in the order of "(a)-> (b)-> (c)-> (d)-> (a) ..." for 10 seconds each. It is configured to display four types of items. The 60,000 balls are the number of shot balls (6000 balls x 10) for one round of the ring buffer. The above (a) corresponds to the cumulative total of 10 sets of continuous accessory ratios stored using 1 byte in FIG. 109, and the above (b) is stored using 1 byte in FIG. 109. The above (c) corresponds to the cumulative total of 10 sets of the existing bonus ratios, the above (c) corresponds to the total cumulative total of the continuous bonus ratios stored using 1 byte in FIG. 109, and the above (d) corresponds to the cumulative total of the continuous bonus ratios in FIG. 109. It corresponds to the total cumulative total of the accessory ratio stored using 1 byte.

As a specific display mode, it is suggested which item is currently displayed in the upper two digits, the continuous accessory ratio when "C0" fires 60,000 balls, and "C1" fires 60,000 balls. In the case, the character ratio, "A0" is the cumulative continuous character ratio, and "A1" is the cumulative character ratio. In addition, the value of the currently displayed item is displayed in% in the lower two digits. In addition, the continuous accessory ratio is displayed, and when it exceeds 60, the display mode of the lower two digits is configured to blink in order to suggest that the value is not normal (others). In some cases, it is lit (displayed). In addition, the accessory ratio is displayed, and when it exceeds 70, the display mode of the lower two digits is configured to blink in order to suggest that it is not a normal value (in other cases). Is lit up). In addition, when the data of launching 60,000 balls is not retained, for example, when only 20000 balls have been launched since the gaming machine started operation, the display mode of the upper two digits is displayed as blinking. (In other cases, it is lit up). The items to be displayed on the ball entry state display device J10 are not limited to those shown in the figure, and the display mode is merely an example.

Next, the lower part of the figure is an example of a display mode different from the eighth embodiment of the ball entry state display device J10. As shown in the figure, the launch ball of the game ball is determined by the lighting mode of the 16-digit lamp. The case of displaying a number is illustrated. In the figure, "non-lighting = 0", "red lighting = 1", and "green lighting = 2" are shown in ternary numbers, and in the example of the figure, "00000021000001100" is shown in ternary numbers. There is. Therefore, when it is converted into a decimal number, it becomes "45963", which indicates that the number of launched balls of the game ball is 45963 balls. In this way, a plurality of lamps capable of expressing a ternary number in three lighting modes may be provided so that the display related to the entry of the ball into the entry port can be executed. Further, the type and display content of the lighting mode of the ball entry state display device J10 may be changed, and for example, the display may be performed using a threshold value. Specifically, "continuous accessory ratio less than 40% → lights off", "continuous accessory ratio 40-49% → green lighting", "continuous accessory ratio 50-59% → yellow lighting", "continuous accessory ratio" It may be configured to notify in four kinds of display modes depending on the value of the continuous accessory ratio, such as "60% or more → lit in red".

With the above configuration, according to the gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment, the ball entry status display device is provided on the main control board M and on the back side surface of the gaming machine. By executing the calculation processing and the display processing of the information related to the ball entry in the processing in the second ROM / RAM area, the data capacity used in the first ROM / RAM area can be reduced, and the accessory ratio can be reduced. By configuring the continuous accessory ratio so that it can be confirmed on the ball entry state display device, it is possible to appropriately confirm whether or not the game is proceeding in the normal state of the game nail.

In the eighth embodiment, a ball entry status display device is provided on the main control board M, and information related to ball entry is provided by the ball entry status display device (in this example, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the information related to the ball entry may be displayed in the error 7-segment provided on the payout control board. In such a configuration, the display start condition of the information relating to the ball entry may be, for example, a long press of the RAM clear button for a predetermined number of seconds or longer. Further, in such a configuration, the display may be switched at predetermined time intervals as in the eighth embodiment. Specifically, when "1 → 3 → 5 → 2 → 4" is displayed by switching every 3 seconds, it may be configured to notify that a total of 13524 game balls have been paid out. ..

Next, FIG. 111 is an example of a board surface configuration applicable to the gaming machine according to this example. The figure shows only the right side of the game area, and illustrates a case where the player performs a right-handed hit (a launch mode in which a game ball is launched toward the right side of the game board surface). In the case of the board surface configuration as shown in the figure, when the right-handed hit is executed, the game ball is easily guided in the vicinity of the second main game start port B10, and is not guided to the second main game start port B10. The game ball is configured to be guided to the general winning opening P10. That is, when the game ball is launched so as to enter the second main game start port B10, almost all the launched game balls are placed in either the second main game start port B10 or the general winning opening P10. It is configured to be guided. With this configuration, it is advantageous for the player even when the direction of the game nail is changed illegally or when the direction of the game nail is changed due to the collision of the game ball with the game nail. A more user-friendly gaming machine can be made by configuring the ball so that it can easily enter one of the two entrances.

Further, in the case of such a board configuration, by calculating the ball entry ratio between the general winning opening P10 and the second main game starting port B10, which can be entered by right-handed hitting, the ball entry ratio is calculated based on the calculated ball entry ratio. It can be configured so that the status (direction, etc.) of the game nails around the general winning opening P10 and the second main game starting opening B10 can be easily grasped (analyzed).

Further, in addition to the board surface configuration as shown in the figure, when the first out port and the second out port are provided as the out ports and the second out port is arranged downstream of the general winning port P10 (general winning opening). When the game ball that did not enter P10 is configured to flow down to the second out opening), the ball entry ratio between the general winning opening P10 and the second out opening is calculated. Based on the calculated ball entry ratio, it can be configured so that the situation (direction, etc.) of the game nails around the general winning opening P10 can be easily grasped (analyzed).

Further, a security dongle may be inserted into the gaming machine according to this example so as to determine whether or not the information related to the ball entry is normal. Specifically, the board (mainly) that manages the transition to the security mode is configured so that it can be determined whether or not the information related to the entry is normal by shifting to the security mode. Security for control board M, sub control board S, prize ball payout control board KH, etc. unless a security dongle is inserted (unless the password in the security dongle and the password managed on the board side match). It is configured not to transition to mode. By shifting to the security mode, information related to entering the ball can be transmitted to the security dongle in the same manner as the above-mentioned collating machine.

The security dongle has a volatile memory and a power source (for example, a backup battery) for supplying electric power to the volatile memory. In the volatile memory, as information related to ball entry, information relating to the range in which the ball entry ratio between the main game start opening and the general winning opening is normal, information relating to the normal range of the accessory ratio, and continuous accessory Information in the normal range of the ratio, information in the normal range of the base value, and the like may be stored. It is preferable that the information in the volatile memory is encrypted and stored in the security dongle. In that case, the side that authenticates based on the information in the volatile memory decrypts the encrypted information. It is preferable to configure it so that it can be used. Further, the security dongle itself may not have a power source for supplying electric power to the volatile memory, and instead may be configured to supply the electric power from the prize ball payout control board side or the main control board M side. (In this case, when the security dongle is removed from the prize ball payout control board or the main control board, the security information may be immediately lost from the volatile memory). If the security dongle is configured so that when the prize ball payout control board or the main control board is removed, the information in the volatile memory is immediately lost, when writing the information to the security dongle, the prize ball payout control is first performed. A security dongle (before writing) is attached to the board or main control board, the power to the game machine is turned on, and then a writer for writing information is connected to the prize ball payout control board or main control board, and then the writing is performed. Write information from the writer (via the prize ball payout control board or main control board) to the security dongle, and then (remove the writer from the prize ball payout control board or main control board) to the prize ball payout control board. The backup power may be supplied to the security dongle from the side or the main control board M side.

Further, by inserting the security dongle, the authentication is completed, and the mode shifts to the security mode, the board (for example, the main control board M) can transmit the information related to the ball entry to the collating machine as described above. You may. Further, the security dongle may be inserted to complete the authentication, and the pachinko / pachislot machine may be configured to shift to the security mode by executing a predetermined operation on the gaming machine. For example, after the authentication of the security dongle is completed, the sub-input button SB may be pressed three times to shift to the security mode. With this configuration, it is possible to configure the mode so that it does not shift to the security mode unless the security dongle is used. Therefore, the player-operable operation of pressing the sub-input button SB three times is set to the security mode. Even if the transition condition is set, the player who does not have the security dongle can be configured so that the transition to the security mode cannot be performed. Further, in the case of the gaming machine in which the entry state display device J10 is attached to the main control board M as described above in the eighth embodiment, the security dongle is inserted to complete the authentication, and the security mode is set. By shifting, the information related to the ball entry is displayed on the ball entry status display device J10 (the information related to the ball entry is not displayed on the ball entry status display device J10 unless the authentication by the security dongle is completed). You may. Further, in the case of a gaming machine in which the ball entry status display device J10 is attached to the main control board M as described above in the eighth embodiment, the security dongle is inserted to complete the authentication, and the operation member (for example, , Sub-input button SB, launch handle D44, RAM clear button, etc.) to shift to the security mode, the information related to the ball entry is displayed on the ball entry status display device J10 (
The information related to the ball entry may not be displayed on the ball entry status display device J10 unless the authentication by the security dongle is completed). Further, the dongle insertion port for inserting the security dongle may be provided at a position where artificial access is difficult from the front side (player side) of the game machine even if the door unit is opened. Good {Since the security dongle only needs to be electrically connected to the prize ball payout control board or the main control board, for example, the security dongle is fixed to these boards and the board to board (or the prize ball payout control board or the main control board or the main control board). The connector part corresponding to the dongle insertion port is pulled out from the control board by a harness, and the security dongle is connected to the connector part) (in addition, it is enclosed in the board case and crimped) to improve security. In that case, there is no need to provide a dongle insertion slot, and even if the door unit is opened, artificial access to the security dongle becomes difficult}.

Further, in this example, one out port C80 is provided, and the game ball that has entered the out port C80 can be detected by the out port entry ball detection device C80s. However, even if a plurality of out ports are provided. Good. For example, a total of two out ports are provided, one at the same position as in the present embodiment (referred to as out port A) and one on the right side of the board (referred to as out port B). A device for detecting a game ball may be provided in each of the out ports so that the game ball that has entered the out port A and the game ball that has entered the out port B can be measured. With such a configuration, more detailed information regarding the flow of the game ball can be generated. That is, even when the general winning openings are provided on both the left side and the right side of the game board surface as in the present embodiment, it is determined that the ball entry ratio between the main game starting opening and the general winning opening is not normal. , It is not possible to determine whether the entry status to the general winning opening provided on the left side of the game board is abnormal or the entry status to the general winning opening provided on the right side of the game board is abnormal. Even in such a case, if the direction of the game nail located near the general winning opening provided on the right side of the game board is changed illegally and it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the general winning opening. By configuring the game ball that did not enter the general winning opening to easily enter the out opening B, which general winning opening is difficult to enter, in other words, which game nail It can be configured so that it is easy to determine whether the orientation of is changed illegally.

Next, FIGS. 112 to 114 show, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the count of the incoming ball, the calculation of the information related to the incoming ball, and the information related to the incoming ball as the configuration related to the information related to the incoming ball. It is a list showing the matters that can be done and the method. As long as these items can be combined with each other, the combined mode is included in the content of this embodiment, and the mode having two or more items in each classification is also included in this example. It shall be. Specifically, it is classified into 13 items A to M as major items, and each has a plurality of minor items as subordinate concepts of the major items. In the remarks column, detailed explanations, measurements (counts), calculations, and reasons for displaying the corresponding sub-items, and specific examples thereof are shown. As will be described in detail below, the present embodiment is not limited to the modes that can be assumed from this list.

First, the major item shown in the upper left of FIG. 112, A. The subordinate concept of the game ball count period (the period for counting the number of game balls entering various entrances) includes the following sub-items.
A1. Anytime count: Not limited to the period during which the maintenance mode is executed, the incoming ball of the game ball is counted at any time even during the period when the maintenance mode is not executed.
A2. Count only during maintenance mode: The number of game balls entered is counted only during the period when maintenance mode is being executed. It may be the entire period during the execution of the maintenance mode, or it may be a predetermined period during the execution of the maintenance mode.
A3. Each business day or specified business period: The game ball can be counted even during the period when the maintenance mode is not being executed, but only the specified date and time (period) can be counted, and the specified date and time ( It may be configured not to count other than the period). The RTC may be used to determine whether or not the period is the specified period. For example, when the business hours of the hall are from 9:00 to 23:00, the business hours are set to RTC (the business hours differ depending on the business area, so the setting can be changed by operating the sub input button or the like. (Available) In addition, the number of winning balls per unit time may be displayed (prevention of adjustment of the base value in the hall). For example, when the business hours are from 9:00 to 23:00, it is possible to set outside the business hours and monitor the entry of balls into various winning openings outside the business hours. In addition, the number of balls entered into various entrances per unit time outside the business hours (for example, in increments of 10 minutes outside the business hours) may be individually managed. With such a configuration, it is possible to detect, for example, a short-time base value adjustment by the person in charge of the hall by caring for the game ball.

Next, the major item, B. There are the following sub-concepts of the measurement mode of information related to ball entry (measurement mode when measuring information related to the entry of a game ball into various entrances).
B1. Predetermined operation on the sub-input button: Maintenance mode can be started and operated by operating the sub-input button. For example, pressing the sub-input button starts measurement and then presses the sub-input button again. You may end the measurement with.
B2. Predetermined operation on the launch handle: For example, by initiating a predetermined operation on the launch handle (eg, touching, rotating, etc.), the measurement is started, and then by ending the operation of the launch handle, the measurement is performed. It may be terminated. The measurement may be started after the operation is continued for a certain period of time, or the measurement may be suspended for a certain period of time after the operation is completed.
B3. Period during which the game ball is flowing down into the game area: For example, the measurement period can be determined by providing a sensor capable of determining whether or not the game ball is flowing down in the game area.
B4. When the total number of confirmed discharge balls exceeds a predetermined value: For example, when the predetermined value is exceeded (in a period such as a predetermined time, a business day, a business week, etc.), the data may be saved. It should be noted that the data should be saved when the number of balls that can be counted, such as the total number of balls entered, the number of balls passed through the out hole, and the number of balls entered in the winning opening, exceeds a predetermined value, not limited to the total number of confirmed balls. May be.

Next, the major item, C.I. There are the following sub-items as a subordinate concept of the ball entry-related count target type (classification regarding the ball entry port that can be counted).
C1. Number of balls entering the first main game start port: When calculating the accessory ratio of K7, which will be described later, the number of prize balls by the electric accessory is not included. Further, in the case of calculating the continuous accessory ratio of K8 described later, it is not subject to the number of prize balls by the accessory continuous device.
C2. Number of balls entering the second main game start port: When calculating the accessory ratio of K7, which will be described later, the number of prize balls by the electric accessory is the target. Further, in the case of calculating the continuous accessory ratio of K8 described later, it is not subject to the number of prize balls by the accessory continuous device.
C3. Number of balls entered into the large prize opening: When calculating the K7 accessory ratio, which will be described later, the number of prize balls by the electric accessory is the target. In addition, when calculating the continuous accessory ratio of K8, which will be described later, the number of prize balls by the accessory continuous device is the target.
C4. Number of balls entered into the general winning opening: When calculating the accessory ratio of K7, which will be described later, the number of prize balls by the electric accessory is not included. Further, in the case of calculating the continuous accessory ratio of K8 described later, it is not subject to the number of prize balls by the accessory continuous device.
C5. Total number of balls entered: The total number of balls entered into the gaming machine, which can be confirmed by, for example, measuring the number of activations of the device for launching the gaming balls and the total number of ejected balls.
C6. Out-port in-ball number: It can be detected by the out-port in-ball detection device. It should be noted that a plurality of out-port and out-port in-ball detection devices may be provided.

Next, the major item, D. The following sub-items are subordinate concepts of the game states to be counted (classification regarding the state of the specific game state and whether or not the special game is being executed). D1. All game states: Counts regardless of the current game state (for example, whether or not the time-reduced game state is being executed, whether or not a special game is being executed). It should be noted that the data may be saved only when there is a game that exceeds a certain period of time.
D2. Probability fluctuation game state and time reduction game state: During the maintenance mode, the game state may be changed (for example, by pressing the RAM clear button).
D3. Probabilistic variable gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state: The gaming state may be changed (for example, by pressing the RAM clear button) during the maintenance mode.
D4. Non-probability variable gaming state and time-saving gaming state: During the maintenance mode, the gaming state may be changed (for example, by pressing the RAM clear button).
D5. Non-probability variable gaming state and non-time reduction gaming state: Only the normal gaming state (non-probability variation game state and non-time reduction gaming state) may be counted. Further, the two game states of the normal game state and the game state other than the normal game state (also referred to as the specific game state) may be counted separately. In the maintenance mode, the game state may be changed (for example, by pressing the RAM clear button).
D6. During special game execution: During maintenance mode, even if the special game is not being executed, it can be forcibly changed to the state in which the special game is being executed (for example, by pressing the RAM clear button). Good.
D7. No special game is running: During maintenance mode, even if the special game is running, it can be forcibly changed to a state where the special game is not running (for example, by pressing the RAM clear button). May be good.

Next, the major item, E.I. There are the following sub-concepts of the confirmation method (information related to the game ball, which is a method of confirming the counted, calculated, and saved data from the outside).
E1. Confirmation with a collator connected to an external terminal: A dedicated machine (for example, a collator) may be connected to the external terminal to read information (for example, writing information such as the number of payouts to a specific RAM area and collating). .. In this case, the configuration may not have a maintenance mode. The security dongle may be used to encrypt the information in the volatile memory to enhance the security.
E2. Confirmed by the ball entry status display device on the main control board M side: All are calculated by the program inside the gaming machine and displayed by peripheral devices.
E3. Confirmed by the effect display device on the sub-control board S side: All are calculated by the program inside the gaming machine and displayed by the peripheral device.

Next, the major item shown in the upper left of FIG. 113, F.I. The subordinate concept of the counting method {method of confirming the number of incoming or outgoing balls (including the case where it is regarded as the number of incoming or outgoing balls in a pseudo manner)} has the following sub-items.
F1. Ball entry sensors provided at various entry ports: The first (second) main game start opening entry ball detection device, auxiliary game start opening entry ball detection device, general winning opening entry ball detection device, etc. It is possible to detect the entry of a ball. It should be noted that each of the entrances may be provided in plurality, and may be counted individually or in total.
F2. Total discharge confirmation sensor: A sensor that detects all game balls that have entered and passed through various entrances.
F3. Payout count sensor: A sensor continuously provided downstream of the prize ball payout unit, which measures the number of game balls paid out to the player.
F4. Sensor that detects that the launch handle is in operation: A sensor that can detect that the launch handle is in operation. The base value, the number of launched balls, and the like may be determined based on the time calculated by the internal timer by the sensor detection.
F5. Number of launches of the launcher: For example, the number of launches of the game ball from the launcher is detected by an internal counter.
F6. Sensor that recognizes the intensity of launching a game ball: For example, it is possible to determine when hitting right (strong) or when hitting left (weak) as the intensity of launch, and the number of launched balls (or the number of ejected balls) can be determined. It may be configured to provide a measurable sensor. From the measurement result by the sensor, it is possible to calculate information related to the ball entering such as the base value.

Next, the major item, G.I. The subordinate concepts of the operator (maintenance mode operator) include the following sub-items.
G1. Inspector: A person who confirms whether the orientation of the game nail is normal, etc., and a person who mainly uses the collating machine and the maintenance mode. For example, an inspector of a gaming machine manufacturer, an inspector of an organization, an inspector of a competent government agency, and the like.
G2. Hall manager: A person who can open the door unit and operate the back of the gaming machine in maintenance mode.
G3. Player: A person who can perform only operations that can be operated by anyone.

Next, the major item, H. The following sub-concepts of the maintenance mode start-up method and the operation method (operation at the time of maintenance start-up and operation method such as display selection after start-up) are as follows.
H1. Sub-input button: Can be activated and operated by the player. After starting the maintenance mode, which cannot be started by the player, the operation in the maintenance mode may be possible by inputting the sub input button.
H2. Door unit open + sub-input button: Since the maintenance mode is displayed by opening the door unit and operating the sub-input button, the player cannot start or operate.
H3. Door unit opening + launch handle operation: Since the maintenance mode is displayed by opening the door unit and operating the launch handle, the player cannot activate or operate. It can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine.
H4. Door unit opening + Main control board M side button (RAM clear button, etc.) operation: The maintenance mode is displayed by opening the door unit and operating the main control board M side button, so the player starts. And cannot be operated. It is preferable that the operation is possible from the back side of the gaming machine and not from the front side of the gaming machine.
H5. Opening the door unit + entering the ball at the entrance when the prize is invalid: Entering the large prize opening when the special game is not being executed, etc. is an invalid prize, and the player opens the door unit during the game. Even if it is opened, the maintenance mode will not be displayed even if a game ball is inserted into the entrance that does not result in an invalid prize.
H6. When the passwords and other verifications match: It is a condition that the player cannot activate and operate the maintenance mode, and even a person involved in the hall cannot activate the maintenance mode unless the passwords and other verifications match. The password may be configured to be changed within a predetermined period (for example, day of the week, etc.).

Next, the major item, I.I. The following sub-items are subordinate concepts of the area for executing processing (the area for processing information related to the game ball).
I1. The winning detection is executed on the main control board M side: The winning number information may be transmitted to the sub control board, and the base value or the like may be calculated and displayed on the sub control board S side.
I2. Calculation of information related to ball entry is executed on the main control board M side: The winning number information (for example, the number of passing each winning opening switch) and the number of payouts are displayed on the display on the main control board M side. It should be noted that a region (for example, a second program) that is not used during normal game progress may be used.
I3. Calculation of information related to ball entry is executed on the sub-control board S side: The display mode on the display on the main control board M side may be different between normal game progress and maintenance mode display (for example,). The amount of information that can be displayed may be increased, such as full-color display.)
I4. The calculation result of the information related to the ball entry is displayed on the main control board M side: Displayed on the ball entry status display device. It should be noted that the main game symbol display device and the auxiliary game symbol display device can also be displayed in a mode (for example, color display, blinking display, etc.) different from that at the time of normal game progress.
I5. The calculation result of the information related to the ball entry is displayed on the sub-control board S side: Displayed on the effect display device. It should be noted that the first effect display device and the second effect display device may be provided as the effect display device, and the information related to the ball entry may be displayed on the second effect display device. The second effect display device is, for example, an effect display device having a display area narrower than that of the first effect display device in the display area, and is displayed on the display target, for example, on the first effect display device. The decorative design, the reserved image, and the error display image to be obtained may be in a mode in which a different display object can be displayed.
I6. Calculation of information related to ball entry is executed on the main control board M side and the sub control board S side, respectively: The calculation results of both may be collated to detect an error (in this case, with the main control board M side). The aggregation period on the sub-control board S side may be different).
I7. Calculation of information related to ball entry is executed by processing in the second ROM / RAM area of the main control board: Winning detection, calculation, or display may be performed in an area that is not used during normal game progress.
I8. Execution of display processing of calculation results of information related to ball entry in the processing in the second ROM / RAM area of the main control board: Detecting, calculating, or displaying winning in an area that is not used during normal game progress. May be good

Next, the major item, J. The following sub-items are subordinate concepts of the method of measuring time (the method of measuring the period that is the reference unit of information related to ball entry).
J1. Interrupt timer: A timer measurement process is provided in the interrupt process that is executed at predetermined intervals.
J2. Clock outside the gaming machine (for example, wristwatch, stopwatch): The inspector himself measures the time, not the timer inside the gaming machine.
J3. RTC: Timer measurement is performed using the RTC.

Next, the major item shown in the upper left of FIG. 114, K.K. The following sub-concepts of the display target of the maintenance mode (information related to the game ball that can be displayed during the maintenance mode) are as follows.
K1. Base value: For example, the base value when the maintenance mode is activated may be displayed, the base value for a predetermined period during the maintenance mode activation may be displayed, or the base value only for a specific gaming state may be displayed.
K2. The winning ratio between the main game start opening and the general winning opening: For example, whether it is normal or abnormal may be displayed at a predetermined timing (predetermined total number of discharges, total number of winnings, etc.).
K3. Number of balls entered in the starting port, general winning opening, and large winning opening: The number of balls entered in the starting opening, general winning opening, and large winning opening only in a specific gaming state may be displayed.
K4. Number of winning balls in the starting opening, general winning opening, and large winning opening: The number of winning balls in the starting opening, general winning opening, and large winning opening only in a specific gaming state may be displayed.
K5. Total number of winnings: The total number of winnings at the starting opening, general winning opening, and large winning opening.
K6. Total number of confirmed discharges: Synonymous with the number of all game balls fired, and is the counter value of the total number of confirmed discharge counters.
K7. Character ratio: The ratio of the number of prize balls to the total number of prize balls by the large prize opening and the prize opening provided with the electric accessory (in this example, the second main game start opening).
K8. Consecutive prize ratio: The ratio of the number of prize balls from the large prize opening to the total number of prize balls.
K9. Number of fired balls: The number of all game balls fired.

Next, the major item, L. As a subordinate concept of the maintenance mode display method (method of displaying information related to the game ball during the maintenance mode), there are the following sub-items.
L1. Ball entry status display device (main control board M side): Displayed in 7 segments on the board surface (x2 in this example).
L2. Effect display device (sub-control board S side): A second effect display device may be provided for display.
L3. Dedicated display on the prize ball payout control board: The player cannot see (for example, a 7-segment display).
L4. Dedicated display on the main control board: It is invisible to the player (for example, a 7-segment display, and in this example, 7-segment × 4).
L5. First (second) main game symbol display device: Only in the maintenance mode, the lamp may be lit in a specific mode as the lighting mode of the specific lamp.
L6. Auxiliary game symbol display device: Only in the maintenance mode, the lamp may be lit in a specific mode as the lighting mode of the specific lamp.
L7. Frame decoration lamp (may be a game effect lamp D26): A variety of lighting modes may be used depending on the lamps that can be lit in three or more types of lighting modes (for example, a special figure and a general winning opening that are different depending on the game state). Notify the ratio according to the light emission mode). With such a configuration, a large amount of information can be notified as information related to entering the ball.
L8. Voice: The information related to the ball entry may be notified by voice whether the information is normal or abnormal. The volume and the like may be different depending on whether it is normal or abnormal.

The major item, M.M. The following sub-items are subordinate concepts of the backup mode (a mode in which information related to the game ball is stored).
M1. Backup of information such as the number of winnings only when the predetermined conditions are met: The predetermined conditions include, for example, the day when 10,000 or more balls are fired, the day when 6000 or more balls are discharged, and the handle operation for a predetermined time. , A predetermined number of balls detected at the out opening, a predetermined number of balls entering the winning opening, and the like.
M2. Backup for a certain period of time regardless of the condition being satisfied: It may be overwritten and updated sequentially.
M3. The erased data on the main control board M side is backed up on the sub control board S side: For example, it may be saved in the FRWM on the sub control board S side.
M4. No backup: Information such as the number of winnings may be cleared when the power is restored.
M5. Erase old information when new information is saved: For example, a ring buffer may be used for backup.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine in this example may have the following configuration. Further, the configurations described in detail below may be configured to have a plurality of combinations.

In order to prevent the hall staff from adjusting the base value such as the number of winnings (for example, manually inserting the game ball into the general winning opening) outside business hours, for example, the sub-control board The S side may be configured so that the number of prizes per unit time and the like can be stored.

In addition, the maintenance mode may be activated (displayed) only when the input key and the verification key match by changing the password, which is collated when the maintenance mode is activated, for each day of the week or the date.

Information related to ball entry may be aggregated on both the main control board M side and the sub control board S side, and it may be possible to confirm whether or not there is a discrepancy in both aggregation results. In this case, the main control board M side counts every hour, while the sub control board S side counts every 15 minutes, and the sub control board S side and the main control board M side count. It may be configured so that the period is different. For example, when the sub-control board S side aggregates in a shorter period than the main control board M side, the number of balls entered in a large amount increases in a short period of time on the sub-control board S side. Or, by decreasing, it becomes a criterion to judge that some adjustment or fraud may have been implemented early. Since the sub-control board S has a larger capacity, even if the aggregation period is shortened, the problem of capacity is unlikely to occur in storing the number of winnings per unit period.

The information data related to the ball entering ball erased on the main control board M side may be stored in the FRWM on the sub control board S side. With such a configuration, the person in charge of the amusement park cannot erase and adjust the data by, for example, removing the battery or short-circuiting the ball in order to adjust the ball entering ball or the like.

Aggregation may be performed during the launch of the game ball {for example, the period during which the launch handle D44 is on by the launch handle touch sensor (sensor that detects that the launch handle D44 is being operated). After being detected by the launch handle touch sensor, the number of balls entered is started after entering one of the entry ports, and after a certain period of time (or launch) after the launch handle touch sensor does not detect the ball. The number of balls entered may be totaled up to (after a certain period of time) after the winning game balls are won.

A sensor that recognizes the strength of launching a game ball (called a game ball launch strength recognition sensor) recognizes the strength of the strength, and when hitting right (launch strength = strong) and when hitting left (launch strength = weak) The game state is determined based on which of the above is executed (non-time shortened game state when left-handed, time-reduced game state when right-handed, etc.), and data corresponding to the determined game state is calculated. It may be that.

By opening the front door unit D18 (the door open flag is on) and winning the winning opening at the time of invalid winning (for example, entering the big winning opening when the special game is not being executed, etc.) It may be configured to display the maintenance mode. When the door unit D18 is opened and the grape clogging is cleared, the mode is switched to the maintenance mode, and in order to prevent the player from seeing the maintenance mode display, when the door unit D18 is opened, the prize is invalid. It is supposed to be displayed only in the case of.

Not only the total of all the winning ratios may be displayed, but also the winning ratios may be displayed according to the winning openings (first (second) main game start opening, large winning opening, and general winning opening). ..

Since the command is transmitted from the main control board M side to each winning port to the sub control board S side, the number of passing through the out port and the number of balls entering, the sub control board S side displays the time series of each data. By displaying the graph, changes in the base value and whether or not an illegal game is executed can be confirmed from the inclination of the graph.

Information related to ball entry to the display device {ball entry status display device J10, auxiliary game symbol display device, first (second) main game symbol display device, etc.} on the main control board M side under control by the main control board M side. When displaying, it is necessary to expand to the data for display and display it, but when using a collating machine, the data is directly sucked up from the specified RAM and displayed in hexadecimal number etc. on the collating machine. It becomes possible.

The number of winnings and the number of payouts of each winning opening may be displayed on the display on the main control board M side. In such a configuration, the switching of each display content can be made possible by, for example, pressing the RAM clear button. Further, the maintenance mode may be displayed so that the display content of the maintenance mode cannot be seen by the player depending on the condition that the disconnection short circuit error can be displayed (for example, the connector of the starting port is pulled out). ..

The cumulative number of prize balls may be configured to be displayed on an error display for error (for example, 7-segment display) provided on the prize ball payout control board. With this configuration, it is possible to check the number of payouts at that time from the power-on on the actual machine. Further, the number of prize balls (number of payouts) may be output as the prize ball information at the outer end.

On the main control board M side, the number of balls passing through the out port (= number of launched balls), the total number of payouts (total number of planned payouts)
, Low base calculation value (total number of prize balls by specific winning openings in non-time reduction game state), high base calculation value (total number of prize balls by specific winning openings in time reduction game state) ) May be saved and used for data display on the indicator lamp on the main control board M side.

By constantly monitoring the information related to the ball entry, the value for low base calculation {base value, non-probability fluctuation game state and non-time reduction game state (main game probability change flag is off and main game time reduction flag is off) ), For example, from the main control board M side under the condition that the value for low base calculation / the number of launching balls × 100 (%) is less than the predetermined%. A command may be transmitted to the sub-control board S side and notified by an effect display device, a frame decoration lamp (may be a game effect lamp D26), or the like.

It may be configured to send a command from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side for the number of passages to each winning port and the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls. On the board S side as well, it is possible to execute a display equal to or higher than that on the main control board M side on the effect display device.

By control on the main control board M side, data such as the number of winnings is sent to the display device {entry state display device J10, auxiliary game symbol display device, first (second) main game symbol display device} on the main control board M side. When displaying, for example, during the display of the standby demo screen, so as not to interfere with the display of the symbol fluctuation, the symbol display, the number of continuous operations of the condition device (the number of consecutive villas), the status notification when the power is turned on, etc. (Using a switch or the like on the back side of the board), it may be configured to shift to the maintenance mode.

The game board surface may be made into an integral molded product so that no game nails are used. Further, the game nails related to the winning openings may be connected as U-shaped nails. In addition, the deviation may be known at a glance by providing a marking (for example, a colored engraving) having a size that hides the head of the game nail so that the game nail does not deviate from the initial position. ..

Further, the gaming machine in this example may be configured so that the player can display information related to entering the ball. Therefore, an example of a configuration in which the player can display information related to entering the ball will be described in detail below.
(1) Information on entering the ball is always displayed on the effect display device.
(2) It is possible to arbitrarily select whether or not to display the cumulative number of balls entered during the game by a predetermined operation on the standby demo screen (when there is no hold).
(3) When a predetermined operation is executed by the player during the game, the cumulative number of balls entered can be arbitrarily switched to a displayable state.
(4) When a specific effect is executed in a situation where the information related to the ball entry is displayed on the effect display device, the information related to the ball entry is hidden during the execution of the specific effect. (Display again after the production is completed).
(5) When the effect display device is configured to have two effect display devices, a first effect display device and a second effect display device, the effect display device is displayed in a part of the display area of the first effect display device. It is possible to switch so that the information related to the incoming ball is displayed on the second effect display device.
It may be configured as described above.

(Summary)
The following concepts can be extracted (listed) based on the configurations shown in the above examples. However, the concepts listed below are just examples, and not only the combination and separation (superimposition) of these listed concepts, but also the concepts based on the further configuration shown in the above examples are added to these concepts. You may.

The pachinko gaming machine related to this concept (1) is
A plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port B10, general winning opening P10,) in which a game ball can be entered and a prize ball is paid out when the game ball enters. 1st prize opening C10, 2nd prize opening C20),
Operable operating members (for example, sub-input button SB, firing handle D44) provided on the front side of the gaming machine, and
It is equipped with an information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, a ball entry status display device J10, an effect display device SG).
Games to each winning opening in the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first major winning opening C10, second major winning opening C20) It is configured so that the ball entry status display, which is a display based on the ball entry status, can be displayed on the information display unit (for example, the ball entry status display device J10, the effect display device SG).
It is characterized in that the ball entry status display is displayed by executing a predetermined operation on the operation member (for example, the sub input button SB, the launch handle D44) while satisfying the predetermined conditions. It is a pachinko game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine related to this concept (2) is
A plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port B10, general winning opening P10,) in which a game ball can be entered and a prize ball is paid out when the game ball enters. 1st prize opening C10, 2nd prize opening C20),
Operable operating members (for example, sub-input button SB, firing handle D44) provided on the back side of the gaming machine, and
It is equipped with an information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, a ball entry status display device J10, an effect display device SG).
Games to each winning opening in the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first major winning opening C10, second major winning opening C20) It is configured so that the ball entry status display, which is a display based on the ball entry status, can be displayed on the information display unit (for example, the ball entry status display device J10).
It is characterized in that the ball entry status display is displayed by executing a predetermined operation on the operation member (for example, the sub input button SB, the launch handle D44) while satisfying the predetermined conditions. It is a pachinko game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine related to this concept (3) is
A plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port B10, general winning opening P10,) in which a game ball can be entered and a prize ball is paid out when the game ball enters. 1st prize opening C10, 2nd prize opening C20),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of a game,
An information display unit that can display information (for example, an effect display device SG),
It is provided with a sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls information display on an information display unit (for example, an effect display device SG).
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
Entering a game ball into the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first major winning opening C10, second major winning opening C20). (For example, ball entry determination means MJ10) and
Control information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting control information necessary for displaying information executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side. With MT)
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A control information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives control information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, and
Information display content control means (for example) that controls the information display content to be displayed on the information display unit (for example, effect display device SG) based on the control information received by the control information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40). , With effect display control means SM20)
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
As the control information, the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port B10, general winning opening P10) detected by the ball entry determination means (for example, ball entry determination means MJ10). , 1st big winning opening C10, 2nd big winning opening C20), the entry detection information which is the information based on the entry status of the game ball into each winning opening is sent to the sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S) side. Can be sent and
When the sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S) receives the ball entry detection information from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M), the sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S) has the plurality of winning openings (for example, for example) based on the ball entry detection information. , 1st main game start opening A10, 2nd main game start opening B10, general winning opening P10, 1st big winning opening C10, 2nd big winning opening C20) A pachinko game characterized in that it is configured to generate information on the ball entry status and display a display based on the generated ball entry status information on an information display unit (for example, an effect display device SG). It is a machine.

The pachinko machine related to this concept (4) is
A plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port B10, general winning opening P10,) in which a game ball can be entered and a prize ball is paid out when the game ball enters. 1st prize opening C10, 2nd prize opening C20),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of a game,
An information display unit that can display information (for example, an effect display device SG),
It is provided with a sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls information display on an information display unit (for example, an effect display device SG).
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
Entering a game ball into the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first major winning opening C10, second major winning opening C20). (For example, ball entry determination means MJ10) and
Information based on the entry of a game ball into the plurality of winning openings (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the general winning opening P10) based on the detection result by the entry determination means (for example, the entry determination means MJ10). The ball entry state information generation means (for example, maintenance mode control means MO) that generates the ball entry state information,
Control information transmitting means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting control information necessary for displaying information executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side. With MT)
The sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S)
A control information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives control information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, and
An information display content control means that controls the information display content to be displayed on the information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the control information received by the control information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). Prepare,
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
As the control information, the ball entry state information can be transmitted to the sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S) side.
When the sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S) receives the ball entry state information from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M), the sub-game unit (for example, the sub-control board S) displays a display based on the ball entry state information (for example, the information display unit (for example)). It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so that it can be displayed by the effect display device SG).

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (5) is
A plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port B10, general winning opening P10,) in which a game ball can be entered and a prize ball is paid out when the game ball enters. 1st prize opening C10, 2nd prize opening C20),
An information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, a ball entry status display device J10) and
It is provided with a main game unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
Entering a game ball into the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first major winning opening C10, second major winning opening C20). (For example, ball entry determination means MJ10)
With
Based on the detection result by the ball entry determination means (for example, the ball entry determination means MJ10), the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game start opening A10, second main game start opening B10, general winning opening P10, first The ball entry status information, which is information based on the entry status of the game ball into each winning slot at the large winning opening C10 and the second winning opening C20), is generated, and the display based on the generated entry status information is displayed. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so that it can be displayed by a unit (for example, a ball entry state display device J10).

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (6) is
A plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port B10, general winning opening P10,) in which a game ball can be entered and a prize ball is paid out when the game ball enters. 1st prize opening C10, 2nd prize opening C20),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) provided on the back side of the gaming machine, which controls the progress of the game,
It is provided with an information display unit (for example, a ball entry status display device J10) that can display information and is attached to a main game unit (for example, main control board M).
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
Entering a game ball into the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first major winning opening C10, second major winning opening C20). (For example, ball entry determination means MJ10)
With
Based on the detection result by the ball entry determination means (for example, the ball entry determination means MJ10), the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game start opening A10, second main game start opening B10, general winning opening P10, first The ball entry status information, which is information based on the entry status of the game ball into the large winning opening C10 and the second major winning opening C20), is generated, and the display based on the generated entry status information is displayed on the information display unit (for example, It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so that it can be displayed by the ball entry status display device J10).

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (7) is
A plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port B10, general winning opening P10,) in which a game ball can be entered and a prize ball is paid out when the game ball enters. 1st prize opening C10, 2nd prize opening C20),
It is equipped with an information display unit (for example, effect display device SG, ball entry status display device J10) capable of displaying information.
The main game club
Entering a game ball into the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first major winning opening C10, second major winning opening C20). (For example, ball entry determination means MJ10) and
Entering a game ball into the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first major winning opening C10, second major winning opening C20). Equipped with a period measuring means (for example, base measurement timer SM32t) capable of measuring the period for monitoring
Based on the detection results detected by the ball entry determination means (for example, the ball entry determination means MJ10) during the period measured by the period measurement means (for example, the base measurement timer SM32t), the plurality of winning openings (for example, the first main game start) Generates ball entry status information, which is information based on the entry status of the game ball into the opening A10, the second main game start opening B10, the general winning opening P10, the first large winning opening C10, and the second large winning opening C20). It is configured to get and
The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that a display based on the ball entry status information can be displayed by an information display unit (for example, an effect display device SG, a ball entry status display device J10).

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (8) is
A plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port B10, general winning opening P10,) in which a game ball can be entered and a prize ball is paid out when the game ball enters. 1st prize opening C10, 2nd prize opening C20),
An information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, effect display device SG, ball entry status display device J10), and
It is equipped with a launching device (for example, launching device D42) capable of launching a game ball into the game area.
Entering a game ball into the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first major winning opening C10, second major winning opening C20). (For example, ball entry determination means MJ10) and
It is provided with a period measuring means (for example, a base measurement timer SM32t) capable of measuring the period during which the game ball is launched by the launching device (for example, the launching device D42).
Based on the detection results detected by the ball entry determination means (for example, the ball entry determination means MJ10) during the period measured by the period measurement means (for example, the base measurement timer SM32t), the plurality of winning openings (for example, the first main game start) Generates ball entry status information, which is information based on the entry status of the game ball into the opening A10, the second main game start opening B10, the general winning opening P10, the first large winning opening C10, and the second large winning opening C20). It is configured to get and
The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that a display based on the ball entry status information can be displayed by an information display unit (for example, an effect display device SG, a ball entry status display device J10).

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (9) is
A plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port B10, general winning opening P10,) in which a game ball can be entered and a prize ball is paid out when the game ball enters. 1st prize opening C10, 2nd prize opening C20),
It is equipped with an information display unit (for example, effect display device SG, ball entry status display device J10) capable of displaying information.
As a gaming state related to the ease of entering a predetermined winning opening, there are a first gaming state and a second gaming state in which it is easier to enter the predetermined winning opening than the first gaming state.
Games to each winning opening in the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first major winning opening C10, second major winning opening C20) It is configured so that the ball entry status display, which is a display based on the ball entry status, can be displayed on the information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG, the ball entry status display device J10).
It is configured so that the display mode of the ball entry status display differs between the case where the ball entry status display is displayed in the first game state and the case where the ball entry status display is displayed in the second game state. It is a pachinko game machine that features it.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (10) is
A plurality of winning openings (for example, main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first) in which a game ball can be entered and a prize ball is paid out when the game ball enters. Large winning opening C10, 2nd large winning opening C20),
It is equipped with an information display unit (for example, effect display device SG, ball entry status display device J10) capable of displaying information.
Detects the entry of a game ball into the plurality of winning openings (for example, main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first major winning opening C10, second major winning opening C20). Possible ball entry determination means (for example, ball entry determination means MJ10) and
Based on the detection results detected by the ball entry determination means (for example, the ball entry determination means MJ10), the plurality of winning openings (for example, the first main game start opening A10, the second main game start opening B10, the general winning opening P10, With a ball entry state information generating means (for example, maintenance mode control means MO) that generates ball entry state information which is information based on the entry status of a game ball into the first major winning opening C10 and the second major winning opening C20). With
A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that a power failure occurs in a situation where the ball entry status information is retained, and the ball entry status information can be retained even after the power is restored from the power failure. Is.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (11) is
A plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port B10, general winning opening P10,) in which a game ball can be entered and a prize ball is paid out when the game ball enters. 1st prize opening C10, 2nd prize opening C20),
Entering a game ball into the plurality of winning openings (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening P10, first major winning opening C10, second major winning opening C20). (For example, ball entry determination means MJ10) and
Based on the detection results detected by the ball entry determination means (for example, the ball entry determination means MJ10), the plurality of winning openings (for example, the first main game start opening A10, the second main game start opening B10, the general winning opening P10, With a ball entry state information generating means (for example, maintenance mode control means MO) that generates ball entry state information which is information based on the entry status of a game ball into the first major winning opening C10 and the second major winning opening C20). ,
It is equipped with a ball entry status output terminal (for example, an external terminal), which is an output terminal capable of outputting ball entry status information.
Pachinko is characterized in that it is configured to output the ball entry state information generated by the ball entry state information generation means (for example, maintenance mode control means MO) at the ball entry state output terminal (for example, an external terminal). It is a gaming machine.

M main control board, MJ game information control means MJ10 ball entry determination means, MJ11-A first main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-B second main game start opening ball entry determination means, MJ11-H auxiliary game start MJ11-C10 1st big prize opening ball judgment means, MJ11-C20 2nd big prize opening ball judgment means MJ11-P general winning mouth entry judgment means, MJ11-C80 out mouth entry judgment means MJ11-C90 total discharge confirmation means, MJ11c-90 total discharge confirmation number counter MJ10b entry-related information temporary storage means, MJ12c start port entry number counter MJ13c general ejection number counter, MJ20 random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A 1 Main game random number acquisition determination execution means, MJ21-B Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H Auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means, MJ30 Hold control means MJ31 Hold digestion control means, MJ31j Fluctuation start condition satisfaction judgment means MJ32 Symbol holding means, MJ32-A 1st main game symbol holding means MJ32b-A 1st main game symbol holding information temporary storage means, MJ32-B 2nd main game symbol holding means MJ32b-B 2nd main game symbol holding information temporary storage Means, MJ32-H Auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32b-H Auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means, MN game content determination means MN10 winning / failing lottery means, MN11-A first main game winning / failing lottery means MN11ta-A for the first main game Win / Fail Lottery Table, MN11-B 2nd Main Game Win / Loss Lottery Means MN11ta-B 2nd Main Game Win / Fail Lottery Table, MN11-H Auxiliary Game Win / Loss Lottery Means MN11ta-H Auxiliary Game Win / Loss Lottery Table, MN40 Symbol Content Determining Means MN41 -A 1st main game symbol determination means, MN41ta-A 1st main game symbol determination lottery table MN41-B 2nd main game symbol determination means, MN41ta-B 2nd main game symbol determination lottery table MN41-H Auxiliary game Design determination means, MN41ta-H auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN50 variation mode determination means, MN51-A first main game variation mode determination means MN51ta-A first main game variation mode determination lottery table, MN51-B second Main game variation mode determination means MN51ta-B second main game variation mode determination lottery table, MN51-H auxiliary game variation mode determination means MN51ta-H auxiliary game variation mode determination lottery table, MP game progress means MP10 display control means, MP 11-C 1st and 2nd main game symbol control means MP11t-C 1st and 2nd main game symbol fluctuation management timer, MP11-H Auxiliary game symbol control means MP11t-H Auxiliary game symbol fluctuation management timer, MP20- B 2nd main game start port Electric accessory opening / closing control means MP21-B 2nd main game start port Electric accessory opening / closing condition determination means, MP22t-B 2nd main game start port Electric accessory opening timer MP22t2 2nd main game start Mouth ball standby timer, MP30 Special game control means MP31 Condition determination means, MP32 Special game content determination means MP32ta Special game content reference table, MP33 Special game execution means MP33-C 1st and 2nd big winning mouth Electric accessory opening / closing control Means, MP33c Winning ball counter MP34 Special game time management means, MP34t Special game timer MP34t2 Open timer, MP34t3 Large winning opening ball entry standby timer MP50 Specific game control means, MP51 Probability change end condition determination means MP52 Time saving end condition determination means, MP52c Time reduction counter MB Game state temporary storage means, MB10-C 1st and 2nd main game state temporary storage means MB11b-C 1st and 2nd main game symbol information temporary storage means, MB10-H Auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB11b -H Auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means, MB20b Special game-related information temporary storage means MB30b Specific game-related information temporary storage means, MO maintenance mode control means ME fraud detection information management means, MEb fraud-related information temporary storage means MT information transmission control Means, MT10 command transmission buffer MG external signal output control means, MH prize ball payout determination means MHsj payout information transmission / reception means, MHsjb payout command temporary storage means MHc prize ball count counter, MHb unpaid prize ball information temporary storage means A 1st Main game peripheral device, A10 1st main game start port A11s 1st main game start port entry ball detection device, A11s2 1st main game start port confirmation sensor A20 1st main game symbol display device, A21g 1st main game symbol display unit A21h 1st main game symbol hold display, B 2nd main game peripheral device B10 2nd main game start port, B11s 2nd main game start port entry ball detection device B11d 2nd main game start port electric accessory, B20 2nd Main game symbol display device B21g 2nd main game symbol display unit, B21h 2nd main game symbol hold display unit C 1st and 2nd main game shared peripheral devices, C10 1st major winning opening C11s 1st major winning opening winning detection device , C11d 1 Large winning opening electric accessory C20 2nd large winning opening, C21s 2nd large winning opening winning detection device C21d 2nd large winning opening electric accessory, P10 general winning opening P11s general winning opening entry ball detection device, J10 entry state Display device C80 Out port, C80s Out port entry ball detection device C90s Total discharge confirmation sensor H Auxiliary game peripheral device, H10 Auxiliary game start port H11s Auxiliary game start port entry ball detection device, H20 Auxiliary game symbol display device H21g Auxiliary game symbol display Unit, H21h Auxiliary game symbol hold display unit S Sub control board, SM effect display control means (sub main control board)
SM10 display information receiving means, SM11b main side information temporary storage means SM20 effect display control means, SM21 decorative symbol display control means SM21n design display content determination means, SM21ta lottery table for determining design fluctuation content SM21b design related information temporary storage means , SM21t Drawing fluctuation time management timer SM22 Drawing hold information display control means, SM22b Drawing hold information temporary storage means SM23 Background effect display control means, SM23n Background effect display content determination means SM23b Background effect related information temporary storage means, SM24 Notice Effect display control means SM24n Notice effect display content determining means, SM24b Notice effect related information temporary storage means SM25 Reach effect display control means, SM25n Reach effect display content determining means SM25b Reach effect related information temporary storage means, SM30 Error notification control means SM31 Error Occurrence determination means, SM40 information transmission / reception control means SS effect display means (sub-sub control unit), SS10 sub-information transmission / reception control means SS20 image display control means, SS21b image display-related information temporary storage means SG effect display device, SG10 display area SG11 decorative symbol Display area, SG12 1st hold display unit SG13 2nd hold display unit SB sub-input button, SBs sub-input button input detection device KH prize ball payout control board, KE prize ball payout device MHc-2 Normal prize ball counter, SM32 Maintenance mode display control means MJ11c-C91 Normal discharge confirmation counter, MJ11c-C92 Total discharge maintenance counter MHc-3 prize ball maintenance counter, SN10c Sub side normal prize ball counter SJ10c Sub side total discharge confirmation counter, SM32t base Measurement timer SJ11c Sub-side start port number of balls entered counter, SJ13c Sub-side general number of balls entered counter SRc RAM clear count counter, MHc-4 non-role counter MHc-5 accessory counter, MHc-6 continuous accessory counter

Claims (1)

Game board and
The game area provided on the game board and
Multiple winning openings where a game ball can be entered and a prize ball is given when the game ball enters,
And the information display unit capable of displaying the information,
Equipped with an discharge detection unit that detects game balls discharged from the game area.
A storage means that can store data,
A ball entry determination means capable of detecting the entry of a game ball into the plurality of winning openings, and a ball entry determination means.
Emission counting means for counting the number of detections in the emission detection unit
With
Based on the detection result by the ball entry determination means, the ball entry state information which is the information based on the entry of the game ball into the plurality of winning openings is generated, and the generated ball entry state information is displayed on the information display unit. It is configured to get and
The ball entry status information can be divided into a plurality of items having different display contents and displayed.
When displaying the ball entry status information on the information display unit, the ball entry status information corresponding to the plurality of items is switched and displayed at predetermined intervals, and the information suggesting each item is displayed at the same time as the ball entry status information. Configured to
It has a ROM and a RAM as the storage means.
The area in the ROM includes a first ROM area related to the progress of the game and a second ROM area not related to the progress of the game, and a predetermined unused area is provided between the first ROM area and the second ROM area. Has been
The area in the RAM includes a first RAM area for storing information related to processing in the first ROM area and a second RAM area for storing information related to processing in the second ROM area, and the first RAM area and the second RAM area A predetermined unused area is provided between them, and the first RAM area includes a first work area and a first stack area, and between the first work area and the first stack area. A predetermined unused area is provided, and the second RAM area includes a second work area and a second stack area, and a predetermined unused area is provided between the second work area and the second stack area. There is an area,
The ball entry state information is calculated using the second RAM area by processing in the second ROM area.
When the ball entry status information exceeds a predetermined value, the display mode of the ball entry status information is displayed on the information display unit in a display mode different from the usual display mode.
When the number of detection by the ejection counting means is less than the specific number, Yu Technical machine it wherein <br/> be displayed on the information display section at a display mode different from the usual information suggesting each item ..

Images